CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION

Law Enforcement Administration

Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

POLICE ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION WITH OPERATIONAL PLANNING

I. INTRODUCTION

A. ORIGIN AND DEFINITION OF THE WORD “POLICE”

The word “POLICE” has originated from the Greek word POLITEIA, which means “a
government of a city”, the Romans borrowed the word modifying it to POLITIA, adopting its meaning. It
was used by the Middle-French word PORICE, which means “public order assured by the State”.

Modern usage of “police” as the “civil force responsible for maintaining public order and
enforcing the law”, came only into recorded usage in the English language in 1798, when the Marine
Police were established to protect merchant shipping on the River Thames in London.

POLICE- body of armed men, which as an institution, is capable of exercising its duties by armed
physical forces in the preservation of peace and order, detection of crime and the execution of laws.

B. FUNDAMENTAL THEORIES OF POLICE SERVICE

1. The Continental Theory. In this theory, policemen are considered as servants of the higher
authorities, and the people have little or no share at all in their duties, nor any direct
connection with them.
2. The Home Rule Theory. Policemen are considered as servants of the community, who
depend for the effectiveness of their functions upon the express wishes of the people. In this
theory, policemen are civil employees whose primary duty is the preservation of the public
peace and security.

C. CONCEPTS OF POLICE SERVICE

1. Old Concept. In this concept, the police is looked upon as a merely repressive machinery.
This means that placing more people in jail rather than keeping them out of jail. Punishment
is the only instrument of crime control, and the yardstick of police efficiency is more on arrest.
2. Modern Concept. This concept considers the police service as an organ of crime prevention.
Its activities include certain aspects of social services, and has for its objectives the welfare of
the individual as well as that of society. The yardstick of police efficiency is the absence of
crime

D. POLICE OBJECTIVES
1. To make sure there is an order in the community;
2. To protect the lives and limbs of every member of the community;
3. To protect the properties of the citizenry; and
4. To render appropriate assistance to other government office concerned

E. BASIC POLICE FUNCTIONS

1. Crime Prevention. It is directed at the elimination or reduction of the desire to commit crime.
2. Crime Control. Refers to the control or neutralization of criminal activity.
3. Regulations or Control of Non-Criminal Conduct. Done by enforcing rules and regulations
and ordinances all aimed at achieving a desired uniform standard of activity among members of
society.

F. THREE (3) GENERAL CATEGORIES OF POLICE ACTIVITIES

1. Primary, Line or Operation Police Functions
2. Secondary, Auxiliary or Service Functions
3. Administrative or Managerial Functions

II. ORGANIZATIONAL CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES

A. CONCEPTS OF ORGANIZATION

Arranging personnel and functions in a systematic manner designed to accommodate stated goals
and objectives in the most efficient manner possible.

B. THE ORGANIZATIONAL CHART- A graphic view of the general structure of work and work
relationship in the organization.
Uses: Understand the command relationships; better understand roles and position in the
organization; training aid.

Page 1 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

C. ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE- A mechanical method of indicating the relationships that exists

among the various workers, work groups, and functions within an organization.

Types of Organizational Structures

1. Line/Military. Oldest, simplest, and clearest form of organization Structure. Authority flows from
the top to the bottom in a clear and unbroken line called “scalar chain”, wherein all operations and
functions are included
2. Line and Staff. The addition of support functions to the line. The line is supplemented by the staff
which give advice and assistance to the line in carrying out its objectives.
3. Functional. A modified line and staff structure modified by the delegation of management authority
to personnel outside the normal span of control.
4. Matrix. Assigning personnel from functional areas such as patrol, detectives support services, etc.
to specific projects (task forces), crime specific problems and/or internal security.

D. PRINCIPLES OF ORGANIZATION APPLICABLE TO THE POLICE

1. Division of Work. An apportioning of works or tasks among the various units or groups
according to some logical plan.
2. Delineation of Responsibility. Lines of authority and responsibility should be made as definite
and direct as possible so that responsibility may properly fixed and duplication avoided.
3. Span of Control. The extent of direction, coordination and control over immediate subordinates.
The span of control of a supervisor over personnel or units shall not be more than what he can
effectively direct and coordinate.
4. Unity of Command. Each individual, unit or situation shall be under the immediate control of one
and only one person.
5. Chain of Command. A line or chain of superiors from top to bottom.
6. Delegation of Authority. It is the division of tasks of command among the officers of the various
units.
7. Integration and Coordination. The efforts of the different units must be coordinated and
integrated so as to accomplish a harmonious progress towards the primary objectives of the
office.
8. Command Responsibility. It means the commander is directly responsible for any act or
omission of his subordinates in relation to the performance of their official duties.
9. Principle of Hierarchy. Requires that each lower level in the organization is supervised by a
higher level.

E. POLICE MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

Definitions
Police Management. The act, art, or manner of administering, controlling or conducting a police
unit or organization.
Police Administration. The direction of the police organization or a part of it, and the use of its
resources in such a manner so as to carry out its functions efficiently.

Managerial and Administrative Activities of the Police Executives(POSDCORB by Luther Gulick)

1. Planning. The process of combining all aspects of the public safety activity and the realistic
anticipation of future problems, the analysis of strategy and the correlation of strategy to detail.
2. Organizing. A process done in structuring a work group into components in order to establish
workable channels of intra-group communication in the performance of an assigned task or tasks.
3. Staffing. Bringing in and out of personnel, training and maintaining the staff the favorable
conditions of work; filling in the organization with the right people in the right job.
3. Directing. Ordering, commanding, instructing, and superintending the subordinates.
5. Coordinating. Process of communicating and harmonizing activities with other units, including in
some cases, agencies outside the police department.
7. Reporting. Keeping the superior informed of what is going on in the organization, which includes
keeping himself and his subordinates also informed through records, researches and inspections.
8. Budgeting. Fiscal planning, accounting and control.

III. PRINCIPLES OF POLICE SUPERVISION

A. THE POLICE SUPERVISOR

Supervisor- In its generic sense, it refers to a person who is in charge with the setting of goals
for performance and deadlines in ways that comply the organization’s plans and vision.

Page 2 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

In its strict sense, it refers to a person in charge to organize workflow and ensures that
subordinates understand their duties or delegated tasks, monitors productivity and provides
feedback and coaching.

Basic Responsibilities of the Police Supervisor

1. Direction
2. Creation of a suitable working climate
3. Employee development
4. Self-development

B. POLICE LEADERSHIP

An activity of influencing people to work harmoniously toward some goal which they
come to find desirable. Also, the ability to obtain from each member of the force the highest
quality of service which he is capable of rendering.

Process by which an individual can influence others in an organization to willingly make

their best effort to achieve the goals of the organization.

Leadership Styles
1. Autocratic- Superior assumes full responsibility for all actions and seeks obedience from the
group in the following out of orders. He determines all policies, and considers decision-making to
be one-man operation.
2. Democratic- Supervisor draws ideas and suggestions from his group by means of discussion
and consultation; the staff is encouraged to take part in making decisions on policy, methods,
goals, etc.
3. Free-Rein- Supervisor is more or less an information booth. He plays down his role in the group’s
activities; he is on hand mainly to provide materials and information, together with minimum
control.
4. Laissez-faire- Leader interferes very little with workers. Productivity and morale suffer, and
unofficial leaders emerge to fill the void.
 
Attributes of a Good Leader
1. Manage time effectively
2. Delegates matters that do not require their personal attention
3. Result oriented
4. Know their strengths and the strengths of those who work for them. More importantly, they
build on these strengths.
5. They do not spread themselves to thin. They concentrate on few areas in which outstanding
results can be obtained.
6. They are effective decision-makers. They realize that decision making is a matter of following a
proven system

C. DISCIPLINE

Basic Concepts and Principles on Discipline

Discipline is derived from the root word “Disciple”, meaning “follower or student”. Thus,
discipline is a two- sided coin. Positive and Negative Discipline.

Forms of Positive Discipline

1. Formal training
2. On-the-job training
3. Corrective interviews
4. Counseling

Forms of Negative Discipline

1. Oral reprimand or warning
2. Written reprimand
3. Loss of assignment
4. Loss of accrued time
5. Suspension without pay
6. Suspension without pay followed by a probationary period
7. Fines
8. Demotion

Page 3 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

9. Termination
10. Judicial action

The “Hot-Stove Rule” in Discipline

Propounded by Douglas McGregor, it suggest that in disciplining erring subordinates the
disciplinary action should be immediate, with warning, consistent and impersonal.

Steps in the Application of “Hot-Stove Rule”

1. Immediate investigation of the offense must be done to determine the facts
2. Previous warning
3. Consistency
4. Disciplinary action must be impersonal

The PNP Disciplinary System

Offenses Subjected to Police Administrative Disciplinary System

1. Citizen’s Complaints- A formal charge initiated by a natural or juridical person or
his/its duly authorized representative or guardian on account of an injury, damage or
disturbance sustained as a result of an irregular or illegal act or omission of a PNP member
1. Breach of Internal Discipline- Any offense committed by a member of the PNP involving
minor offense and affecting order and discipline within the police organization.
3. Summary Dismissal Cases- With notice and without notice.

Administrative Offenses Covered by the Disciplinary System

1. Neglect of duty or nonfeasance
2. Irregularities in the performance of duty or misfeasance
3. Misconduct or malfeasance
4. Incompetence
5. Oppression
6. Dishonesty
7. Disloyalty to the government

Acts Constituting BREACH OF DISCIPLINE in the PNP:

1. Simple misconduct and negligence
2. Insubordination
3. Frequent absences or tardiness
4. Habitual drunkenness
5. Gambling prohibited by law

Summary Dismissal Cases

 1. With Due Notice and Summary Hearing
1.1 When the charge is serious and evidence of guilt
is strong
1.2 When the respondent police officer is a recidivist or has been repeatedly
charged and there are reasonable grounds to believe that he is guilty of the charges
1.3 When the respondent police officer is guilty of a serious offense involving
conduct unbecoming of a police officer
2. Immediate Dismissal-When the PNP Officer go on absence without leave (AWOL)for a
continuous period of thirty (30) days or more.

Disciplinary Authorities ON CITIZEN’S COMPLAINTS

1. Chief of Police- Offense is punishable by withholding of privileges, restriction to specified limits,
suspension of forfeiture of salary, or any combination thereof, for a period not exceeding fifteen
(15) days;
2. Mayors of Cities or Municipalities- Offense is punishable by withholding of privileges,
restriction to specified limits, suspension or forfeiture of salary, or any combination thereof, for a
period of not less than sixteen (16) days but not exceeding thirty (30) days;
3. People’s Law Enforcement Board (PLEB)- Offense is punishable by withholding of
privileges, restriction to specified limits, suspension or forfeiture of salary, or any combination
thereof, for a period exceeding thirty (30) days; demotion or by dismissal from the service.
 
Disciplinary Authorities on BREACH OF INTERNAL DISCIPLINE
1. Chiefs of Police or Equivalent Supervisors- imposable penalty is admonition; reprimand; restriction
to specified limits; withholding of privileges; forfeiture of salary or suspension; or any combination thereof:
Provided, that in all cases, the total period shall not exceed fifteen (15) days.

Page 4 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

2. Provincial Directors or Equivalent Supervisors- imposable penalty is admonition or reprimand;

restrictive custody; withholding of privileges; forfeiture of salary or suspension; or any combination of the
foregoing: Provided, that in all cases, the total period shall not exceed thirty (30) days.
3. Regional Directors or Equivalent Supervisors- Offense(s) is punishable by dismissal from the
service, admonition or reprimand; restrictive custody; withholding of privileges; suspension or forfeiture of
salary; demotion; or any combination of the foregoing: Provided that in all cases, the total period shall not
exceed sixty (60) days.
4. Chief of the PNP- Offense(s) is punishable by dismissal from the service; demotion; suspension or
forfeiture of salary, or any combination thereof for a period not exceeding one hundred eighty (180) days.
Restrictive custody during the pendency of a grave administrative or criminal case against the erring
police officer.
 

Disciplining Authorities on SUMMARY DISMISSAL CASES

1. National Police Commission

2. PNP Chief
3. PNP Regional Directors

Disciplinary Appellate Boards/Bodies

1. Regional Appellate Board (RAB) and National Appellate Board (NAB) of the National Police
Commission (NAPOLCOM)
2. Secretary of the Department of Interior and Local Government (SDILG)
3. Civil Service Commission (CSC)

Regional Appellate Board (RAB)

Composition of the RAB

1. Senior Officer of the NAPOLCOM Regional Office- Chairperson
2. One (1) representative each from the PNP- Member (term of 3 years)
3. Regional Peace and Order Council- Member (term of 3 years)

Cases Appealable to the RAB:

1. Decisions of the PLEB where the penalty is DEMOTION OR DISMISSAL from the service;
2. Decisions of the PNP Regional Director or equivalent supervisor, where the penalty imposed is
DEMOTION OR DISMISSAL from the service;
3. Decisions of city and municipal Mayors in cases falling within their respective jurisdictions; and
4. Disciplinary recommendations of the Regional IAS which were not acted upon by the PNP
regional director or equivalent supervisor within thirty (30) days from submission by the Regional IAS,
where the recommended penalty is DEMOTION OR DISMISSAL from the service.

Effect of the Failure of RAB to Decide on Appeal Cases within the Reglementary Period of 60 Days
1. The decision of the disciplinary authority shall become final without prejudice to the filing of an appeal
by the party adversely affected to the SILG;
2. The RAB concerned shall automatically make a written explanation to the NAPOLCOM en Banc on its
failure to do so; and
3. The NAPOLCOM en Banc shall order the conduct of investigation against the RAB Chair and PNP
representative concerned if it appears from the explanation that an evident neglect of duty was committed
 
National Appellate Board (NAB)

Composition of the NAB:

1. Vice chairperson and Executive Officer- Chairperson
2. Four (4) Regular Commissioners

Cases Appealable to the NAB:

1. Decisions of the Chief, PNP where the penalty imposed is DEMOTION OR DISMISSAL from the
service;
2. Disciplinary recommendations of the Inspector General, IAS that were not acted upon by the Chief,
PNP within thirty (30) days from submission by the Inspector General, IAS where the recommended
penalty is DEMOTION OR DISMISSAL; and
3. Decision of the Inspector General affirming the Resolution of the Regional IAS dismissing the complaint
for lack of probable cause.
 
Cases Appealable to Secretary to the SILG: Decisions of the NAB and the RAB
Cases Appealable to the CSC:

Page 5 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

1. Decisions of the SILG in the exercise of its appellate jurisdiction

2. Decisions of the NAPOLCOM en banc as summary dismissal authority

Preventive Suspension
When: Upon motion of the complainant, at any time after a case is formally filed but before the
presentation of complainant’s evidence is terminated.
Period: not exceeding ninety (90) days

Grounds/Circumstances:
1. Preventive Suspension by the Disciplinary Authority
1.1 The charge is serious or grave and the evidence of guilt is strong; or
1.2 There is evidence to show that the respondent is exerting efforts to harass, intimidate,
coerce, or unduly influence the complainant or his/her witnesses into withdrawing his complaint or
retracting his sworn statement or that of his witnesses against the respondent or to tamper with the
evidence.

2. Preventive Suspension Upon Request by the PLEB

2.1 The respondent refuses to heed the PLEB’s summons or subpoena
2.2 The PNP personnel have been charged with offenses involving bodily harm or grave threats
2.3 The respondent is in a position to tamper with the evidence
1.4 The respondent is in position to unduly influence the witnesses

D. ORDER GIVING

Classification of Orders

1. Command or direct orders

2. Request orders
3. Implied orders
4. Call for volunteers

E. PNP Complaints and Grievance System

Complaint. A verbal or written expression of the feeling of dissatisfaction with some aspects of
personnel working conditions, relationships of status which are beyond the capacity of the PNP members
to change or control unilaterally.
Grievance. A complaint in writing which has, in the first instance and in the
employee’s/subordinates opinion, been ignored, overridden or dropped without due consideration.
Grievance Procedure. The method of determining and finding the best way to remedy the
specific cause or causes of a complaint or grievance and the system to insure the adjudication of such.

Four-Step Approach in Handling Grievances

1. Receive the grievance properly
2. Gather the necessary facts
3. Make decision, and implement it
4. Take follow-up action

Complaints and Grievance Policy (NAPOLCOM MC No. 93-021)

PNP uniformed personnel shall have the right to present complaints and/or grievances to the
management and have them settled as expeditiously as possible to the best interest of the employee
concerned, the PNP organization and the government as a whole. Towards this end, the PNP
management shall ensure the fair, speedy and equitable settlement of employee’s complaints and/or
grievance in accordance with approved rules and procedures.

Scope of Complaints and Grievance Machinery

PNP Complaints and Grievance Machinery cover grievances on uniformed PNP Personnel
against:
1. Peers
2. Supervisors and subordinates of parallel units
3. Rules/Circulars and implementation

Matters/ Issues Covered by Complaints and Grievance Machinery

1. Implementation of policies, practices and procedures
2. Exercise of discretion
3. Favoritism or improper placements or assignments or transfers
4. Conferment/giving of recommendations and awards, promotions and salary increases
5. Working conditions

Page 6 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

6. Tools and equipment

7. Any other similar and significant matters that may cause employee/subordinate
dissatisfaction

F. BUILDING AND MAINTAINING POLICE OFFICER’S MORALE

Morale- A state of mind which reflects the degree to which a member of an organization has
confidence in the organization and the other members of his work group. Also, a reflection of the degree
to which an employee believes in the objectives of the organization, and desires to accomplish them.

Factors that Affect Morale

1. Quality of Leadership
2. Salary levels and other remuneration received by employees, including fringe benefits
3. Levels of discipline in the organization
4. Quality of supervision received
5. Opportunity for individual growth and promotion
6. Working Condition in general

Criteria in Measuring Morale

1. Quality and quantity of work performed

2. Absentee rates
3. Volume of negative disciplinary actions
4. Number of grievances reported
5. Group cohesiveness
6. General appearance of personnel
7. Accident rates
8. Attitudes toward the leadership and goals of the group

Strategies in Building Morale

1. Administer discipline in fair and impartial manner.

2. Praise employees in public, and criticize them in private.
3. Always recognize good performance.
4. Provide employees with an opportunity for individual growth.
5. When possible, explain the reasons for departmental policies and procedures.
6. Distribute work fairly and equitably.

IV. EVOLUTION OF THE POLICING SYSTEM AND LAW ENFORCEMENT

A. The Lex Talionis

B. The Code of Hammurabi [2200 BC]
C. Nile River Police in Egypt [1340BC]
D. The Praetorian Guard and Urban Cohort [510 BC]
E. Roman System of Vigiles [27 BC]
F. Law Enforcement In England Based On Traditional Notions
Of Individual Justice And Punishment [400-800]
G. System of Shires, Hundreds, and Tithes Established by
Alfred the Great [899]
H. Statute Of Winchester that Established The Watch- And-
Ward System In England[1285]
I. Justices Of The Peace First Appointed By The King Of
England [1326]
J. Formation of the Bow Street Runners in London [1748]
K. CREATION OF THE LONDON METROPOLITAN POLICE [1829]
In 1829, Sir Robert Peel introduced the Metropolitan Police Act which was passed by the
Parliament of England. This is milestone of England’s police force. For his contribution to the
modernization of the police force, Sir Robert Peel was regarded as the Father of Modern
Policing System.

Sir Robert Peel’s Principles of Policing (1829)

1. The police must be stable, efficient, and organized along military lines.
2. The police must be under government control.
3. The absence of crime will best prove the efficiency of
the police.

Page 7 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

4. The distribution of crime news is essential.

5. The deployment of police strength both by time and area
is essential.
7. No quality is more indispensable to a policeman than a
perfect command of temper; a quiet determined manner has more effect than violent action.
7. Good appearance commands respect.
8. The securing and training of proper persons is at the
root of efficiency.
8. Public security demands that every police be given a
number.
9. Police headquarters should be centrally located and
easily accessible to the people.
11. Policemen should be hired on a probationary basis.
12. Police records are necessary to the correct distribution
of police strength.

L. FORMAL POLICING IN THE UNITED STATES

1. The Sheriff
Originally appointed, which became an elected position. The sheriff is mandated to
enforce the law, apprehend criminals, service of warrant and subpoenas, and maintaining local
jails. Later on, its functions are expanded which include collection of taxes and monitoring of
cattle branding.

2. The Watch Systems

Consist of volunteer citizens, it is based on the concept of community responsibility.
Members of the community were required by local law enforcement officers to undertake patrols
of their neighborhood under the guidance of local marshalls or constables. Their powers were
limited only to arrest and holding individuals suspected of wrongdoing.

3. The Vigilante Committee

Composed of area residents wishing to actively fight crime would take on all law
enforcement duties, from pursuing offenders to trying them to punishing them. Individual
landholders often employed these vigilantes to protect them, and in many cases the threat of
violence was the only effect deterrent to potential offenders.

4. Slave Patrols and the Jim Crow Laws

Considered the precursor to modern police forces in the US, it emerged in the South out
of fear of possible slave insurrection. Slave patrols enforced slave codes prohibiting such things
as literacy, commerce, and the possession of weapons.

M. THE ERAS OF AMERICAN POLICING [G.L. Kelling and M.H. Moore]

1. The Political Era [1840-1930]
2. The Reform Era [1930-1980]
3. The Community Era [ 1980-present]

N. HISTORICAL BACKGROUND OF THE PHILIPPINE POLICE SYSTEM

THE LOCAL POLICE

1. The Barangay Period

Prior to Spanish colonization, the Philippines was divided into political units called the
Barangay. Each barangay was headed or ruled by a Datu whose responsibility, aside from
exercising all the powers – executive, legislative and judicial was to maintain peace and order
within his jurisdiction. The Datu designated from among his warriors a chief warrior who, together
with some subordinates were charged with the duty to enforce the decrees, customs and
traditions as well as practices and usages. The chief warrior was then in effect the chief of police.

2. Spanish Regime
Police functions during the Spanish Regime consist mainly of the following: (a) the
suppression of brigandage by patrolling unpacified areas; (b) the detection of local or petty
uprisings by spying upon the work and movements of the people; and (c) the enforcement of tax
collection including church revenues.

Page 8 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

a) Carabineros de SeguridadPublica (1712). Organized for the purpose of carrying out the
regulations of the department of State. It became police-like when reorganized and named
Cuerpo de SeguridadPublica [Corps of Carrabineros for Public Security]. Its specific
duties were watching and guarding the custom houses, rivers, seacoasts, tobacco
warehouses and the prevention of entry of contraband. It developed into a more special kind
of police for land and sea.
b) The Cuadrilleros (1836). Consist of the required five percent able-bodied male inhabitants of
each province who enlisted in the organization for three years. The duties were to maintain
peace and order in the towns, patrolling, guarding the tribunal and prison cells, and other odd
duties in the town. Each members of the organization in each town were formed into
company. Administered like a military unit, having officers of different ranks and enlisted men
of different grades.
c) The Guardia Civil (1852. Functions include checking highway robbery to a certain extent;
apprehension of political offenders, detection of the enemies of the church.

3. The Revolutionary Government Period

When the Filipinos revolted against the Spanish rule, the Insurrectos emerged to
exercise police authority over the areas within their jurisdiction. With their de facto government
they imposed taxation, military conscription and was responsible for the peace and order situation
in general.

4. The American Military Occupation

General Order No. 43 on August 8, 1899 vesting in the “ Lieutenant of Police the
powers to arrest or order the arrest of persons violating city ordinances, disturbing the peace or
accused of a crime.” The Lieutenant of the Police is equivalent of our police station commanders
at present. The local police was organized for pacification duties and as adjunct to the military.

On July 18, 1901 Act No. 175, entitled. “An Act Providing for the Organization and
Government of Insular Constabulary and for Inspection of the Municipal Police” was
promulgated; the local police force continue to exist, under the “inspection” power of the Insular
Constabulary

THE PHILIPPINE CONSTABULARY

The Philippine Constabulary was formally inaugurated with Lt. Col. Henry Allen as its chief.
The First Filipino Chief of the Philippine Constabulary is Brig. General Rafael Crame who was
appointed as PC Chief on December 1917.

THE NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION

Organized on September 12, 1966 by virtue of Republic Act No. 4864 which was
approved on September 8, 1966. The act created the POLCOM as an advisory body to the
President on all matters affecting local police administration.

Its purposes are to promote a higher degree of efficiency in the organization,

administration and operation of local police agencies with the end view that peace and order may
be maintained more effectively and the laws enforced with more impartiality, and place the local
police service on professional level.

THE INTEGRATION OF THE PHILIPPINE CONSTABULARY AND LOCAL POLICE

Sec 12, Article XV of the 1973 Constitution provided that “The State shall establish and
maintain an integrated national police force whose organization and operation shall be
provided by law.” This Constitutional mandate has been implemented by various Presidential
Decrees and Letter of Instruction.

Presidential Decree Nos. 421, 482, 531 and 641 have provided for the integration of
municipal/city police and fire departments and jails into law enforcement units known as
Metropolitan Police Force in the Greater Manila Area and provincial integrated police forces in the
provinces. These integrated police forces have been placed under the operational and
administrative control of the Philippine Constabulary.

All these Presidential Decrees culminated in the promulgation of Presidential Decree

No. 765 on August 8, 1975 establishing and constituting the Integrated National Police with the
Philippine Constabulary as the nucleus and the local police forces, and city and municipal fire
departments as components.

Page 9 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

On August 26, 1977, PD 1184- otherwise known as “INP Personnel Professionalization

Law of 1977”, was enacted, paving the way of giving specific role of women in the police
organization, such as: handling of youth or juvenile control units, custodial service as jail matrons,
training and administrative duties, and other police operations where their services are necessary
or more effective like handling investigation, search and arrest of female youth offenders.

V. THE CREATION OF THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE

A. CONSTITUTIONAL PROVISION RELATED TO THE CREATION OF THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL

POLICE
“The state shall establish and maintain one police force, which shall be national in scope and
civilian in character to be administered and controlled by a National Police Commission, the
authority of Local Executives over the police units in their jurisdiction shall be provided by
law.”(Section 6, Article XVI)

The PNP Under the Reorganized Department of Interior and Local Government (DILG)

By virtue of R.A. No. 6975, otherwise known as Department of the Interior and Local Government
Act of 1990, signed by Pres. Corazon Aquino on December 13, 1990 and took effect on January 1, 1991,
the PNP came into being as a bureau under the DILG.

The National Police Commission (NAPOLCOM)  

1. Relationship with the Department of Interior and Local Government (DILG): Attached to the
DILG for policy and program coordination.
2. Composition: Chairperson, four (4) regular commissioners, and the Chief of the PNP as Ex
Officio member.
3. Total : Five (5) Commissioners and a Chairperson
4. Appointing Authority: All are appointed by the President with the Secretary of the DILG
as Ex officio Chairperson.
5. Power: It exercises administrative control and operational supervision over the PNP.
6. Term of office: 6 years without reappointment or extension.
7. Offices: National, Regional and Provincial

The Philippine National Police [PNP]

The Philippine National Police (PNP) is a community and service oriented agency
responsible for the maintenance of peace and order and public safety. It is organized to ensure
accountability and uprightness in police exercise of discretion as well as to achieve efficiency and
effectiveness of its members and units in the performance of their functions.

Initial Composition
1. Former INP members
2. Commissioned officers and enlisted personnel of the PC
3. Members of the Inspection, Investigation and Intelligence Branch of NAPOLCOM (I.I.I.B.)
4. Civilian operatives of the CIS

Offices/Functions Absorbed
1. National Action Committee on Anti-Hijacking Security (NACAH),
former under the DND
2. All the functions of the Philippine Air Force Security Command
(PAFSECOM)
3. Police functions of the Philippine Coast Guard (PCG)

Organizational Structure, Position Title, Functions and Rank

1. THE COMMAND GROUP: Vested with the power to command and direct the PNP.
Position Title Rank
Chief of the PNP Police General
Deputy Chief of the PNP for Admin. Lieutenant General
Deputy Chief of the PNP for Operation Lieutenant General

2. THE CHIEF OF THE DIRECTORIAL STAFF: Serves as the Chief Operations Officer of the PNP that
coordinates, supervises and directs the Directorial Staff and the PNP units in the performance of their
respective functions.

Page 10 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

3. THE INTERNAL AFFAIRS SERVICE (IAS): Assists the Chief PNP in ensuring operational readiness
and investigates infractions of the regulations committed by members of the PNP.
4. THE HUMAN RIGHTS AFFAIRS OFFICE (HRAO): Serves as manager of the facility that supervises
the implementation of the guidelines and policies on human rights laws.
5. THE CENTER FOR POLICE STRATEGY MANAGEMENT (CPSM): Serves as the central facility of the
PNP coordinating and integrating all strategy management processes, sustaining the strategy execution
and management, and instilling in the organization a culture of strategy focus.
6. THE DIRECTORIAL STAFFS: Composed of sixteen (16) Directorates, which has its own defined
specialization:
6.1 Directorate for Personnel and Records Management ( DPRM): Optimizes the utilization of
personnel resources both from the uniformed and non-uniformed personnel.
6.2 The Directorate for Intelligence (DI): Manages the gathering/collating of intelligence
objectives through effective management of all intelligence and counterintelligence activities of the PNP
and also serves as the linkage of all foreigners with official transactions with the Chief, PNP.
6.3 The Directorate for Operations (DO): Exercises command, control, direction, coordination
and supervision of all activities of the PNP operations including the deployment and employment of
personnel.
6.4. The Directorate for Logistics (DL): Administers and manages material resources needed
for the PNP operations.
6.5 Directorate for Plans (DPL): Plans and programs strategic PNP operations. Also represents
the PNP in the Inter-agency and international affairs on peace and order.
6.6 The Directorate for Comptrollership (DC): Administers and manages PNP’s fiscal financial
resources.
6.7 The Directorate for Police Community Relations (DPCR): formulates and implements
community related activities, programs and projects and supervises the PNP Salaam Police Center.
6.8 The Directorate for Investigation and Detective Management (DIDM): Coordinates,
controls and supervises all investigation activities.
6.9 The Directorates for Human Resource and Doctrine Development (DHRDD): Formulates
policies on matters pertaining to human resources and doctrine development.
6.10 The Directorate for Research and Development (DRD): Engages in research and
development and does testing and evaluation of self-reliant projects.
6.11 The Directorate for Information and Communication Technology Management
(DICTM): Integrates and standardizes all PNP information systems and resources to further improve the
frontline services.
6.12 The Directorates for Integrated Police Operations [(DIPO’s) in Eastern Mindanao;
Western Mindanao; Visayas; Southern and Northern Luzon]: Direct and supervise the conduct of
integrated anti-criminality, internal security, counterterrorism operations, promote inter-operability with the
AFP, and provide a system to promote regional socio-economic development.

7. PNP NATIONAL SUPPORT UNITS

National Administrative Support Units (NASU)

7.1 Logistics Support Service [LSS]: Provides logistical support services to all PNP units.
7.2 Information Technology Management Service [ITMS]: Provides information technology
services to all PNP units.
7.3 Finance Service [FS]: Responsible for the disbursement and accounting of PNP funds, and
performs other fiscal functions.
7.4 Health Service [HS]: Provides medical and dental services to PNP personnel and their
dependents.
7.5 Communication and Electronic Service [CES]: Provides communication electronic
services and support to all PNP units.
7.6 Chaplain Service [CHS]: Provides spiritual and other counseling services for PNP personnel
and their dependents.
7.7 Legal Service [LS]: serves as the legal arm of the PNP.
7.8 Headquarters Support Service [HSS]: Provides administrative and technical support to
National headquarters.
7.9 Engineering Service [ES]: Implements PNP engineering programs, land utilization and
housing activities.
7.10 Training Service [TS]: Conduct training courses geared towards skills enhancement,
intellectual advancement and moral transformation of PNP personnel.
7.11 PNP Retirement and Benefits Administration Service [PRBS]: Administers the
retirement, separation and death benefits of PNP personnel.

National Operational Support Units ( NOSUs)

7.12 Maritime Group [MG]: Performs police and law enforcement functions over Philippine
territorial waters, lakes, rivers, along coastal areas to include ports and harbors and small islands for the
security and the sustainability development of the maritime environment.

Page 11 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

7.13 Intelligence Group [IG]: Serves as the intelligence and counterintelligence operating unit of
the PNP.
7.14 Police Security and Protection Group [PSPG]: Provides security to government vital
installations, government officials, visiting dignitaries and private individuals authorized to be given
protection.
7.15 Criminal Investigation and Detection Group [CIDG]: Monitors, investigates, prosecutes
all crimes involving economic sabotage, and other crimes of such magnitude and extent as to indicate
their commission by highly placed or professional criminal syndicates and organizations. It also conducts
organized crime control on all major cases involving violations of the Revised Penal Code, Special Penal
Laws assigned to them, atrocities committed by the subversive elements.
7.16 Special Action Force [SAF]: serves as the PNP’s main mobile strike force or a reaction
unit to augment regional, provincial, municipal and city police force for civil disturbance control, internal
security operations, hostage-rescue operations, search and rescue in times of natural calamities,
disasters and national emergencies and other special police operations. To enhance its operations, The
PNP Air Unit is placed under the supervision of the SAF.
7.17 Aviation Security Group [AVSEGROUP]: Provides security to all airports throughout the
country.
7.18 Highway Patrol Group [HPG]: Enforces traffic laws and regulations, promote safety along
the highways, enhances traffic safety consciousness through interagency cooperation concerning police
traffic safety engineering, traffic safety education and traffic law enforcement functions and develops
reforms in the crime prevention aspect against all forms of lawlessness committed along national highway
involving the use motor vehicles.
7.19 Police Community Relation Group [PCRG]: Undertakes and orchestrates police
community relations program and activities in partnership with concerned government agencies, the
community, and volunteer organizations in order to prevent crime and attain a safe and peaceful
environment.
7.20 Civil Security Group [CSG]: Regulates business operations and activities of all organized
private detectives, watchmen, security guards/ agencies and company guard forces, and supervise the
licensing and registration of firearms and explosives.
7.21 Crime Laboratory [CL]: Provides scientific and technical, investigative aide and support to
the PNP and other investigative agencies. It also conducts crime laboratory examination, evaluation and
identification of physical evidence gathered at the crime scene with primary emphasis on medical,
biological and physical evidence.
7.22 PNP Anti-Kidnapping Group [PNP-AKG]: Serves as the primary unit of the PNP in
addressing kidnapping cases and in handling hostage situations.
7.23 PNP Anti-Cybercrime Group [PNP-ACG]: Enforce pertinent laws on cybercrimes and
cybercrime campaigns of the PNP.

8. THE MAIN OPERATING UNITS

8.1 National Capital Region Police Office
a. Regional Public Safety Mngt. Battalion [RPSMB]
b. District Police Offices
c. Police Stations
d. Sub stations
8.2 Police Regional Offices [PROs]
a. Regional Public Safety Mngt. Battalion [RPSMB]
b. Police Provincial Offices [PPOs]
b.1 Provincial Public Safety Mngt. Coy [PPSMC]
b.2 Municipal/Component City Police Station
b.3 Precincts
c. City Police Offices [(in a highly urbanized and independent
cities) CPOs]
c. 1 City Public Safety Mngt. Coy
c.2 CPO Police Stations

G. Classification of CPS and MPS

1. Components Cities
a. Type “A” for cities with population ranging from 100,000 and above
b Type “B” for cities with population ranging from 75, 000 to less than 100,000
c. Type “C” for cities with less than 75,000 population
2. Municipalities
a. Type “A” for those with population ranging 75,000 or more
b. Type “B” for those population ranging from 30,000 to less than 75,000
c. Type “C” for those population less than 30,000

Page 12 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

Manning Level in the PNP:

Minimum- 1:1000
Average- 1:500

Key Positions: Refer to positions of major responsibility over a command, office or unit.
Key Positions in the PNP
1. Chief, Philippine National Police
2. The Deputy Chief, PNP for Administration
3. The Deputy Chief, PNP for Operations
4. The Chief of the Directorial Staff
5. The Directors of the Directorial Staff
6. Regional Directors, Police Regional Offices
7. Directors, National Support Units
8. District Directors, NCRPO
9. Provincial/City Directors
10. Group Directors, RPSB(NCRPO)
11. Chief of Police/ Station Commanders

Powers and Functions Of the PNP

1. Enforce all laws and ordinances relative to the protection of lives and properties;
2. Maintain peace and order and take all necessary steps to ensure public safety;
3. Investigate and prevent crimes, effect the arrest of criminal offenders, bring offenders to justice
and assist in their prosecution;
4. Exercise the general powers to make arrest, search and seizure in accordance with the
constitution and pertinent laws;
5. Detain an arrested person for a period not beyond what is prescribed by law, informing the
person so detained of all his rights under the constitution;
6. Issue licenses for the possession of firearms and explosives in accordance with law;
7. Supervise and control the training and operations of security agencies, and to security guards
and private detectives, for the practice of their professions; and
8. Perform such other duties and exercise all other functions as may be provided by law.

Vision, Mission, Philosophy and Core Values

Vision
Imploring the Aid of Almighty God, by 2030, WE shall be a highly capable, effective and
credible police service working in partnership with a responsive community towards the
attainment of a safer place to live, work, and do business.
 
Mission
Enforce the law, prevent and control crimes, maintain peace and order, and ensure public
safety and internal security with the active support of the Community.
 
Philosophy: Service, Honor and Justice
  Core Values: Maka Diyos, Makatao, Makabayan at Makakalikasan

Rank Classification, Insignias And Badges

NEW PNP RANKING SYSTEM (R.A. 11200-Feb 8, 2019)
OLD NEW OLD NEW

DGEn PGEN SPO4 PEMS

DDG PLTGEN SPO3 PCMS
Dir PMGEN SPO2 PSMS
C/Supt PBGEN SPO1 PMSg
S/Supt PCOL PO3 PSSg
Supt PLTCOL PO2 PCpl
C/Insp PMAJ PO1 Pat
S/Insp PCPT
Insp PLT

Page 13 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

INSIGNIAS
PLT to PCOL shall wear insignia which shall be attached approximately one inch from the front
and lower side edges of the collar lapel. For BGEN and higher, insignia shall be pinned on the shoulder
board measuring 5 ¼ and 2 ¼ in width.

Rank Insignia:
a.) 4,3,2,1 silver stars for PGEN, PLTGEN, PMGEN and BGEN., respectively.
b.) 3,2,1 silver sampaguita cluster for PCOL, PLTCOL, and PMAJ, respectively
c.) 2,1 bronze anahaw leaf for PCPT, and PLT, respectively
d.) PNCO –Chevron
e.) Executive SPO-PEMS –chevron in white sampaguita cluster at the center flanked by gold laurel
leaves.

BADGES
a.) Police Badge –Center of the left breast pocket
b.) Combat Citation Badge-Above the right pocket on the top of citation badges
c.) Parachutist/EDC/Pilot Wings/Technical Service Badges- Above the left pocket on the top of the service
decorations.

THE PEOPLE’S LAW ENFORCEMENT BOARD [PLEB]

The PLEB is a Disciplinary board created by the Sangguniang Panlungsod/Bayan in every city
and municipality which hear and decide citizen’s complaint against erring officers of the PNP.

There is AT LEAST ONE (1) PLEB for EVERY 500 city or municipal police personnel and for
each of the legislative districts in a city. In addition, it serves as CENTRAL RECEIVING entity for any
citizen’s complaint against officers and members of the PNP. lt take cognizance of or refer the complaint
to the proper disciplinary or adjudicatory authority WITHIN 3 DAYS upon the filing of the complaint.

Composition
 1. A member of the Sanggunian Panlungsod/bayan chosen by his/her respective sanggunian;
2. A punong-barangay of the city or municipality concerned chosen by the Liga ng mga Barangay;
and
3. Three (3) other members, who can be removed only for cause, chosen by the city/municipal peace
and order council from among the respected members of the community known for their probity and
integrity, one/ (1) of whom must be a woman and another, a member of the Bar or in the absence thereof,
a college graduate, or, the principal of the central elementary school in the locality.

INTERNAL AFFAIRS SERVICE (IAS)

Established by virtue of R.A.8551. It has an investigative and adjudicatory power over the PNP
members. It is a part of the PNP BUT enjoining an independence from the PNP.

0rganization of the Internal Affairs Service:

National Office- Headed by Inspector General to be assisted by
Deputy Inspector General
Area (Regional) Office- Headed by Director
Provincial office- Headed by a Superintendent

Powers of the IAS Over the PNP

1. Pro-active conduct inspections and audits of PNP personnel and units
2. Investigate complain and gather evidence in support of an open investigation.
3. Conduct summary hearing on PNP members facing administrative charges.
4. Submit a periodic report on the assessment, analysis, and evaluation of the character and
behavior of the PNP personnel and units to the Chief PNP and the NAPOLCOM.
5. File appropriate criminal cases against PNP members before the court as evidence warrants
and assist in the prosecution of the case.
6. Provide assistance to the Office of the Ombudsman in cases involving personnel of the PNP.

Motu Proprio Investigation

1. Incidents where a police personnel discharge a firearms
2. Incidents where death, serious physical injuries, or any violation of human rights occurred in
the conduct of police operations.
3. Incidents where a suspect in the custody of police was seriously injured.

Page 14 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

4. Incidents where the evidence is compromised, tampered with, obliterated, or lost while in
custody of police personnel.
5. Incidents where the established rules of engagement has been violated.

Recommendatory Duty in the Promotion: Tasked to provide documents or recommendations as

regards to the promotion of the PNP members or the assignment of the PNP personnel to key position.

Recommendatory Power in Discipline: Disciplinary measures recommended by IAS against an erring

PNP personnel, once final, cannot be revised, set-aside, or unduly delayed by any disciplining authority
without just cause. Any disciplining authority who fails to act or who acts with abuse of discretion on the
recommendation of the IAS shall be made liable for gross neglect of duty. The case of erring disciplinary
authority shall be submitted to the Director General for proper disposition.

Entry Qualification to the Internal Affairs Service: Voluntary subject to rigid screening where only
those who, with at least 5 years experience in the Law enforcement , and no derogatory records.
may allowed to enter.
 
Aside from allowances allowed by law, IAS members are granted occupational specialty pay not
exceeding 50% of the base pay.

Inclusions of Supervisors and Superiors in Internal Affairs Service Investigation: Immediate

supervisor or superior of the personnel of unit being investigated is automatically included in the
investigation to determine lapses in administration and supervision.

GENDER SENSITIVITY PROGRAM

Gender Sensitivity Program in the PNP

1. Creation of Women’s Desk in all police stations throughout the country- to administer and attend
to cases involving crime against chastity, sexual harassment, abuses committed against women and
children and other similar crimes.
2. Prioritization of women for the recruitment and training within five (5) years from the effectivity
of RA 8551- to serve in the Women’s desk. To achieve it, in every recruitment nationwide, 10% of its
quota are allocated for women.
3. Establishment of equal opportunities for women in the PNP, the prevention of sexual harassment in the
workplace, and the prohibition of discrimination on the basis of gender or sexual orientation.
4. Administrative Liability to any personnel who shall violate the established rules and regulations
regarding gender sensitivity and gender equality [The penalty for the violator shall be suspension
without pay for not less than thirty (30) days and shall undergo gender sensitivity seminar or training:
Provided, That any personnel who violates the rules more than twice shall be recommended for
demotion or dismissal from the PNP].

E. RELATIONSHIP OF THE DILG WITH DEPARTMENT OF NATIONAL DEFENSE (DND) IN

COUNTER INSURGENCY (COIN) FUNCTION.

The Department of the Interior and Local Government is relieved of the primary responsibility on
matters involving the suppression of insurgency and other serious threats to national security.

COIN became the function of the DND through the AFP. However, the PNP, through information
gathering and performance of its ordinary police functions supports the AFP upon matters involving
suppression of insurgency. Likewise, the President may call on the PNP to support the AFP in
combat operations.

PARTICIPATION OF LOCAL GOVERNMENT EXECUTIVES IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF THE PNP

Governors and/or Mayors, once elected are automatically become deputies of the NAPOLCOM
in the administration of the PNP personnel assigned in their area of jurisdiction.

A. Power to Choose PD and/COP

Governor: from the 3 recommendees by the Regional Director.
Mayor: from the 5 recommendees by the Provincial Director

B. Power to employ and deploy: authority to recommend to the Chief of Police or Provincial Director
the transfer, reassignment or detail of PNP members outside of their respective city or town.

Page 15 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

C. Control and Supervision of Anti-Gambling Operations

D. Grounds for Suspension or withdrawal of Deputation by the NAPOLCOM: Unless reversed by

the President; after consultation with the provincial governor and congressman concerned, the
NAPOLCOM may suspend or withdraw the deputation of any local executive for any of the following
grounds:
1) Frequent unauthorized absences
2) Abuse of authority
3) Providing material support to criminal elements OR
4) Engaging in acts inimical to national security or which negate the effectiveness of the peace and
order campaign

IV. DEFINITION AND MEANING OF PLANNING

Planning- The process by which the managers of an organization set objectives, make an overall
assessment of the future, and chart the courses of action with a view to achieving the organizational
goals. Planning is concerned with the establishment of objectives of an organization and finding out the
way of realization of those objectives.

Characteristics of Planning

1. Intellectual Process
2. Goal Orientation
3. Primary Function
4. Pervasiveness
5. Uniformity
6. Continuity
7. Flexibility
8. Simplicity
9. Precision
10. Feasibility
11. Choice Among Alternative Courses
12. Efficiency
13. Inter-dependence
14. Forecasting

V. IMPORTANCE OF PLANNING

1. Providing basis of decision

2. Focusing attention on objectives
3. Minimizing uncertainty and risk
4. Adapting with changes
5. Securing economy
6. Helping in co-ordination:
7. Making control effective
8. Increasing organizational effectiveness

VI. PRINCIPLES AND ELEMENTS OF PLANNING

1. Principle of commitment
2. Principle of the limiting factor
3. Principle of reflective thinking
4. Principle of flexibility
5. Principle of contribution to organizational objectives
6. Principle of efficiency
7. Principle of selection of alternatives
8. Principle of planning premises
9. Principle of timing and sequence of operations
10. Principle of securing participation
11. Principle of pervasiveness
12. Principle of strategic planning
13. Principle of innovation
14. Principle of follow-up

Page 16 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

VII. THE LAW ENFORCEMENT PLANNING

Definitions

Plan – an organize schedule or sequence by methodical activities intended to attain goal and objectives
for the accomplishments of mission or assignment. Plan provides answer to 5W’s and 1H, viz:
1. What to do – Mission/objectives
2. Why to do – Reason/philosophy
3. When to do – Date/time
4. Where to do – Place
5. Who will do – People involve
6. How to do – Strategy

Operational Planning – the use of rational design or pattern for all departmental undertakings rather
than relying on chance. The preparation and development of procedures and techniques in accomplishing
of each of the primary task and function.

Police Planning – is an attempt by the police administration to allocate anticipated resources to meet
anticipated service demands. The systematic and orderly determination of facts and events as basis for
policy formulation and decision affecting law enforcement management.

Police Operational Planning – the act of determining policies and guidelines for police activities and
operations and providing controls and safeguards for such activities and operations in the department.
- The process of formulating coordinated sequence of methodical activities and the allocation of resources
to line units of the police organization for the attainment of the mandated objectives.

Other Terms:

Goal – a general statement of intention and typically with a time horizon. It is an achievable end state that
can be measured and observed. Making choices about goals is one of the most important aspects of
planning.

Objective – a specific commitment to achieve a measurable result with in a specific period of time.

Strategy – is a broad design, method; a plan to attain a stated goal or objective.

Tactic – is a specific design, method, or course of action to attain a particular objective in consonance
with strategy.

Procedure – a sequence of activities to reach a point or to attain that, which is desired.

Policy – a product of prudence wisdom in the management of human affairs.

Guidelines – a rule of action for the rank and file to show them how they are expected to obtain the
desired effect.

General Emergency Plan – set of procedures to meet varying degree of emergency while at the same
time providing continuing police coverage of areas not affected by the emergency.

Specific Emergency Plan – a sub-type of plan to meet unusual need, which is similar to general
emergency plan but it is basically for certain specific situation.

Planning in Police Operation Expects to:

1. Improve analysis of problems
2. Provide better information for decision-making
3. Help clarify goals, objectives and priorities
4. Result is more effective allocation of resources
5. Improve inter and intradepartmental cooperation and coordination
6. Improve the performance of programs
7. Give the police department a clear sense of direction
8. Provide the opportunity for greater public support
9. Increase the commitment of personnel

Significance and Importance of Planning in Police Operations

The ever increasing and constant change of the complexity of our society and the police
operations demands the utmost skill and careful planning in order to insure the accomplishment of police

Page 17 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

objectives and mission. The management of police organization requires a changing style to keep
abreast with the changing society to make the organization stable, thus, planning is a continuous process.

Responsibility in Planning
1. Broad External Policy Planning
It is the responsibility of the legislative branch of the government.

2. Internal Broad Planning

It is the responsibility of the C/PNP and other chiefs of the different units or headquarters
within their area of jurisdiction to achieve the objectives or mission of the police organization.

Characteristics of Effective Plans

1. The plan must be sufficiently specific so that the behavior required is understood.
2. The benefits derived from the achievement of the goals associated with the plan must offset the
efforts of developing and implementing the plan, and the level of achievement should not so
modest that it is easily reached.
3. Involvement in their formulation must be as widespread as is reasonably possible.
4. Should contain a degree of flexibility for the unforeseen.
5. There must be coordination in the development and implementation of plans with other units of
the government whenever there appears even only a minimal for such action.
6. There must be coordination in the deployment of personnel and the implementation within the
police department to ensure consistency.
7. As may be appropriate, the means for comparing the results planned for versus the result actually
produced must be specified before implementation.

Factors Affecting Planning

1. Condition
2. Time
3. Resources Available
4. Skills and Attitudes of Management
5. Social and Political Environment
6. Physical Facilities
7. Collection and Analysis of Data

Objectives of Police Planning

1. To increase the chances of success by focusing on results and not so much on the objectives.
2. To force analytical thinking and evaluation of alternatives for better decisions.
3. To establish a framework for decision making consistent with the goal of the organization.
4. To orient people to action instead of reaction.
5. To modify the day-to-day style of operation to future management.
6. To provide flexibility in decision making.
7. To provide basis for measuring original accomplishments or individual performance.
8. To increase employee and personnel involvement and to improve communication.

Characteristics of Good Police Plan

1. With clearly defined goals and objectives
2. Simplicity, directness and clarity
3. Flexibility
4. Possibility of attainment
5. Must provide standards of operation
6. Economy in terms of resources needed for implementation

Characteristics of a Good Police Operational Plan

A good police operational plan:
1. Reflects the experiences of the line officers
2. Incorporates the finding of the police statistician
3. Contains the conclusion of the crime analyst
4. Incorporates the counsel of the staff officers
5. Includes the advice of every organic personnel and unit involved in planning

Page 18 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

Classification of Plan

A. According to Coverage
1. National Plan-Those broad internal plans prepared by the national headquarters.
2. Regional Plans-Plans that are devised by the Regional Police Offices.
3. Local Plan- Police plans devised by the city or municipal police stations.

B. According to Time
1. Strategic or Long Range Plan- A set of goals (usually five to ten) that outlines the path for the
organization’s future.
2. Intermediate or Medium Range Plan- Medium-term plans outline the organization’s direction for
several years into the future.
3. Operational or Short Range Plan- Short-range plans generally constitute a specific time frame
in which a specific series of operations will be carried out, assessed, and measured.

Planning Approaches
1. Synoptic Approach- This is problem-oriented based planning appropriate for law
enforcement organization. It relies heavily on the problem identification and analysis. It uses
conceptual or mathematical models to relate the ends (objectives) to the means (resources
and constraints). Its real advantage is its basic simplicity.
2. Incremental Approach-It means to break down the long-term planning horizon into smaller
entities, i.e. to. develop an overall plan with intermediate stages which are complete projects
by themselves.
3. Transactive Approach- This approach focuses on interpersonal dialogue that develops
ideas, which will be turned into action.
4. Advocacy Approach- A pluralistic and inclusive planning where planners seek to represent
the interests of various groups within society.
5. Radical Planning- An approach which the planners have central role to mobilize collective
action of the society. They can play their role as mediators, negotiators, and activists. These
roles of planners require necessary skills such as communication, negotiation, knowledge,
and leadership.

Types of Police Plans

1. Policy or Procedural Plans. Standard operating procedures which guide members in routine
and field operations and in some special operations.

Kinds of Procedural Plan

1.1 Office Procedures such as: reporting regulations and records division operation
1.2 Field Procedures- outline of procedures intended to be used in all situations to
guide officers and men in the field, such as: reporting, dispatching, raids, arrests,
stopping suspicious persons, receiving complaints, touring beat, investigation of
crimes, use of physical force, restraining devices, dealing with group or individuals,
and the like.
1.3 Headquarters Procedures- it include the duties of the dispatcher, jailer, matron,
and other personnel concerned which may be neglected in the duty manual.
1.4 Special Operating Procedures- it include the operation of the special units, such
as auxiliary force, searching and preservation of physical evidence, dissemination of
information of wanted persons, inspection of police headquarters, and the like.

2. Tactical Plan. Procedures for coping with specific situations at known locations. Included in
this category are plans for dealing with attacks against building with alarm system and
against headquarters by lawless elements, blockade and jail emergencies, special
community events, and street affairs.

3. Operational Plans. Plans for the operations of special divisions like the patrol, detective,
traffic, vice and juvenile control divisions. It is prepared to accomplish each of the primary
police tasks.
Types of Operational Plans

Page 19 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

3.1 Regular Operating Program- designed to meet everyday round needs.

3.2 Meeting Unusual Needs- those resulting from intermittent and usually unexpected
variations in activities that demand their attention.

4. Extra- Department Plans (Extra Management Plans). Plans for handling large scale
disasters such as floods, storms, typhoons, earthquakes, fires, etc., which require the
assistance of other government agencies and the marshalling of all resources to meet the
situation.

5. Management Plans. Plans dealing with budget, accounting procedures, purchasing guides,
recruitment of personnel, training, selection, personnel and organization.
5.1 Budget Plan- Estimated present and future money needs for personnel, equipment,
and capital investment. The ideal budget for police force is at least 20% of the total
budget of the city or municipality, in no case shall it be less than 17%.
5.2 Accounting Procedures- Established accounting procedures and expenditure
reports to assist in making administrative decisions and in holding expenditures
within the appropriations.
5.3 Specifications and Purchasing Procedures- Drawn equipment and supplies
specifications and procedures for checking deliveries against specification of orders

5.4 Personnel- Procedures to assure the carrying out of personnel program and the
allocation of personnel among the component organizational units in proportion to
need.
5.5 Organization- Organization plan of the department composed of duties and
responsibilities of each department and their relationships which should not be in
conflict with the police manual.

Steps in Police Planning and Operations

Steps in Planning in General

A plan is essentially today’s design for tomorrow’s action and an outline of the steps to be taken
in future. A good plan must be simple, balanced and flexible, and make utmost use of the existing
resources. It must be based on clearly defined objectives.

1. Perception of the Opportunities

2. Establishment of the Objectives
3. Building the Planning Premises
4. Identifying the Alternatives
5. Evaluation of the Alternatives
6. Choice of the Course of Action
7. Formulation of Supporting or Derivative Plans
8. Establishing the Sequence of Activities:
9. Securing Participation
10. Providing for Future Evaluation

Steps in the Development of Police Plan

1. Frame of Reference- Careful view of the matters relating to the situation for which plans are
being developed and opinions or ideas of persons who may speak with authority in the
subjects of concern. Definitive views of the chief of police officers, other government officials,
and other professionals are considered.
2. Clarifying the Problems- Identification of the problem, and understanding both its record
and its possible solution. A situation must exist for which something must and can be done.
3. Collecting all Pertinent Facts- Gathering of all facts related to the problem. No attempt
should be made to develop a plan until all facts relating to it have been gathered.
4. Analyzing the Facts- Careful analysis and evaluation of the data gathered, which provide the
basis from which a plan or plans evolved. Only facts that are related should be considered.
5. Developing Alternative Plans- Development of several alternative measures in the initial
phase of plan development which appear to be logically comparable to the needs f the
situation. As evaluated, one of the proposed plans will usually prove more logical than the
others.

6. Selecting the Most Appropriate Alternatives- Careful consideration of all facts which lead
to the selection of best plan.

Page 20 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

7. Selling the Plan- Involvement or consultation to the heads of the units or offices or persons
concerned during the plan development for their acceptance. A plan, to be effectively carried
out must be subscribed by persons concerned at the appropriate level of the plan’s
development.
8. Arranging for Execution of the Plans- Issuance of orders and directives to the involved
units and personnel, the establishment of schedule, and the provision of manpower and
equipment for carrying out the plan. Briefings and assurance that all personnel involved
understand when, how and what is to be done.
9. Evaluating the Effectiveness of the Plan- Determination of the result of the plan. This is
necessary to know whether a correct alternative was chosen, the plan is correct, which phase
poorly implemented and whether additional planning may be necessary.

POLICE PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT

A. Personnel Management, Defined

Personnel Management- Management function that concerns with promoting and enhancing the
development of work effectiveness and advancement of human resources in the organization, through
proper planning, organizing, directing, coordinating and controlling activities; related to procurement,
development, motivation, and compensation of employees to achieve organizational goals.

Functions Under Personnel Management

1. Personnel Planning- process of analyzing an organization’s human resources needs under
changing conditions and developing activities to satisfy these needs.
2. Personnel Recruitment and Selection [See R.A. 7041]
3. Appointment, Placement and Assignment
4. Performance Appraisal
5. Personnel Compensation and Welfare Benefits
6. Career and Employee Development
7. Discipline
8. Separation from the Service

Police Personnel Program. Plan of action, formal or informal, designed to implement organization
philosophy or creed and personnel philosophy of central managers in relation to people so as to
accomplish organizational objectives.

Human Wants Essential in Eliciting Maximum Personnel Efficiency

1. Adequate pay
2. Opportunity for advancement
3. Recognition for good work
4. Interesting and meaningful work
5. Reasonable security
6. Recognition and respect for the individual as a human being

Five Areas of Personnel Program

1. Acquiring competent personnel [human resource planning, job description and
specification, recruitment, selection, placement, transfer, separation, etc.]
2. Holding and retaining competent personnel [fair wages, reasonable working hours, other
employees benefits]
3. Developing and motivating personnel [ training, education, appraisal, promotion,
suggestion system, etc.]
4. 4. Labor and human relations [application of laws and court decisions affecting personnel
actions, proper attitude, courtesy and behavior of all employees from top to bottom]

5. 5. Efficient program administration [attitude in the application, implementation and

interpretation of organization policies, rules and regulations]

Personnel Policies
Policy. General plan of action that serves as guide in the operation of the organization. All the
policies of the organization make up the basic framework of management decisions which set the course
of the organization to follow.

Types of Policies
a) According to their origin

Page 21 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

(1) Originated Policy- This type of policy comes from the top level management and is intended
to set up guidelines in the operation of the organization. It is usually broad in scope to allow subordinates
officers some latitude in implementing them in the form of minor policies or rules and procedures.
(2) Appealed Policy- A policy borne when problems arise at the lower levels of the organization
and the person in charge does not know how to meet the problem. He then appeals to his superiors for
guidance. The decision made by top management on the matter becomes a precedent and a guide for
future action.
(3) Imposed Policy- A policy that came from government agencies in the form of laws,
administrative orders, and rules and procedures or contract specifications.

b) According to their subject matter

(1) General Statement of Principles- Policies stated in broad terms, such as statement of
objectives, philosophy or creed
(2) Statement of Procedures- Pertains to procedures to be taken in certain situations and are
narrower in scope than statement of principles. Normally, directions are given, but the specific solution to
a problem is not stated so that the policy may apply to as many situations as possible.
(3) Specific Rules-It can cover specific situations. They are more direct and less flexible. While
they can solve specific problems however, they can cause more irritations because of their rigid nature.

Communicating Personnel Policies

a) Handbooks
b) Policy Manual
c) Numbered Memoranda and Circulars
d) Bulletin Boards
e) Meetings and conferences-

Job Descriptions and Specifications

Job description may be defined as an abstract of information derived from the job analysis
report, describing the duties performed, the skills, training and experience required, the responsibilities
involved, the conditions under the job is done, and the relation of the job to the other jobs in the
organization.
Job specification is the statement of the qualification and traits of the worker so that he may
perform the job properly. It specifies the type of employee which the job calls for in terms of skills,
experience, training, and other special qualifications.

E. ACQUIRING COMPETENT AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

Definition of Terms
Recruitment. The process of attracting candidates who have the maximum qualifications to be
eligible for the selection procedure. [RA 7041]
Selection. Process of screening out/eliminating undesirable applicants that do not meet the
organization’s selection criteria
Appointment. Selection by the authority, vested with power, of an individual who is to exercise
the functions of a given office.

Selection: General Qualifications (Sec. 14 of R.A. 8551 amended by R.A. 9708)

1. A citizen of the Philippines;
2. A person of good moral conduct;
3. Must have passed psychiatric/psychological drug physical tests to be administered by the PNP
or by NAPOLCOM accredited government hospital for purpose of determining physical and
mental health.
4. Must possess a formal baccalaureate degree from a recognized institution of learning;
5. Must be eligible in accordance with the standards set by the commission;
6. Must not have been dishonourably discharged from military employment or dismissed for cause
from any civilian position in the government;
7. Must not have been convicted by final judgment of an offense or crime involving moral turpitude;
8. Height: Male= 1.62m. (5’4’’)/ Female= 1.57m. (5’2”)
9. Weight: Not more or less than 5kgs. From the standard weight corresponding to his/her height,
weight, age, and sex; and
10. Age: 21 to 30 years old

Recruitment and Selection Procedures

1. Preparation and proper approval of quota allocation
 Regular or attrition quota
 Prepared by DPRM and confirmed by NAPOLCOM
2. Posting/Publication of Notice of Recruitment (RA 7041)

Page 22 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

3. Submission and acceptance of application folders

 Secretariat of the Unit concerned
4. Evaluation of the application folders
 The Secretariat with NAPOLCOM representative reviews applicants folder to check compliance
with Qualification Standards
5. Psychiatric/ Psychological Examination (PPE) (MCO No. 2011-004 approved on Feb. 1, 2011 is now
before the PAT)
 For the ranking 150% of the Quota
 Conducted by the Neuro-Psychiatric Section, PNPHS
 Written and Oral
 Either RECOMMENDED or NOT RECOMMENDED
 No retake for 6 months
6. Physical, Medical and Dental Examination
7. Physical Agility Test (PAT), with the supervision of a NAPOLCOM Representative
 Conducted by designated unit
 Pull-up for men, horizontal bar hang for female
 Two minutes push-ups
 Two minutes sit-ups
 100 meter dash
 1000 meter run
 Passing= 75%
 Absolute No Retake
8. Drug Test and complete Background Investigation (shall not follow the sequential steps but shall be
conducted on passers only anytime the PPE, PMDE, or PAT but before Final Interview)
9. Essay Writing
 Conducted by the Secretariat of unit with quota
10. Final Interview
 Conducted by the Recruitment and Selection Board
11. Deliberation by the Board
12. Resolution of Appointment
13. Issuance of Appointment
 The Chief PNP for applicants at the national office
 The PNP Regional Director for applicants at regional level
 The Director of the concerned NSU for applicants of that unit
 Appointment is temporary
14. Oath Taking
15. Certification by NAPOLCOM
16. CSC Attestation
17. Issuance of Order and Designation of Account Numbers
18. Assignment of Badge Number
19. Addition to the PNP Roster
20. Addition to the PNP Alpha list
21. Issuance of PNP Identification Cards
22. Payments of Salary to Payroll

Sequence of Examinations/Tests During the Selection and Appointment of Police Applicant

1. Preliminary Interview (NAPOLCOM MC No. 2011-007 in connection with NAPOLCOM
MC No. 2004-006)
2. Psychiatric/Psychological Examination [(PPE) NAPOLCOM MC No. 2011-004]
3. Complete Character and Background Investigation
4. Complete Physical, Medical, and Dental Examination (PMDE)
a) General appearance
b) Nose, mouth and teeth
c) Genitals
d) Varicose veins
e) Arms, legs, hands, and feet
f) Eyes
g) Respiration
h) Circulation
i) Brain and nervous system
j) Kidneys
5. Physical Agility Test (PAT)
a) Pull-up for men, horizontal bar hang for female
b) Two minutes push-ups

Page 23 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

c) Two minutes sit-ups

d) 100 meter dash
e) 1000 meter run
6. Final Committee Interview [(FCI) aptitude, likability, affability, outside interest, conversational
ability, disagreeable mannerism, etc]

Police Appointment: Kinds of Appointment

1. Permanent. An appointment issued to a police officer after having completed the the PSBRC and
FTP for 12 months involving actual experience and assignment in patrol, traffic and investigation
(NAPOLCOM MC No. 2005-002)
2. Temporary. An appointment issued to police officer who meets the required education and eligibility
for the rank to which he is appointed except the training requirement.

Waiver for Appointment

The age, height, weight and education requirements for initial appointment to the PNP may be
waived.
The waiver issued by the NAPOLCOM en banc through the recommendation of the Committee
on Waiver after considering the following:
a) The number of qualified applicants falls below the minimum quota;
b) Endorsement of the Chief PNP;
c) Outstanding accomplishment or possession of special skills in law enforcement, police work,
martial arts, marksmanship and similar skills; Special talents in the field of sports, music and
others; and extensive experiences of training in forensic science and other technical services.

Special Waiver and Preferential Consideration for Appointment in the PNP

1. Grant of Special Waiver under Resolution No. 2002-048
a) Direct filing of waiver to the NAPOLOM is now allowed without endorsement from the Chief PNP, in
so far as application for age and height waivers by the top twenty board passers of the Criminologist
Licensure Examination and related disciplines where examinees exceeds 2,000.

Note: If the examinees fall below 2,000, only top ten board passers can avail the privilege.

b). A waiver for height requirement shall be automatically granted to applicants belonging to the
cultural communities. (Sec. 15, RA 8551)

2. Grant of Preferential Consideration for Appointment in the PNP to the Widow/Widower, or Any
of the Beneficiaries, of a PNP Member, who Died or Incurred Total and Permanent Disability
while in the Performance of Duty
a) The widow/ widower has the first priority in the recruitment. However, he/she can waive said
privilege in favour of any one of the qualified beneficiaries
b) If said widow/widower, or beneficiary, possesses highly technical qualifications, She/he may
be considered for lateral entry to the PNP

Appointment of Officers Via Lateral Entry

Persons who may be Appointed PCOs in the PNP via Lateral Entry
1. Those with highly (1) TECHNICAL QUALIFICATIONS applying for the PNP technical services,
such as, dentist, optometrist, nurses, engineer and graduates of forensic sciences shall be
appointed Inspectors; while doctors of medicine, members of the Bar, and chaplains shall be
appointed to the rank of senior inspector in their particular technical services.
2. GRADUATES OF THE PNPA shall be automatically appointed to the rank of inspector.
3. LICENSED CRIMINOLOGIST may be appointed to the rank of inspector to fill up any vacancy
after promotions from the ranks are completed (See NAPOLCOM MC No. 2003-010).

Note: The application must possess other qualifications prescribed under Sec. 14, RA 8551 and
must be able to meet the height, weight and age.

Appointing Authority and Manner of Appointment

1. Pat to PEMS- Appointed by the RD or by the C/PNP for the national headquarters personnel and
attested by the CSC.
2. PLT to PLTCOL- Appointed by the C/PNP, as recommended by their immediate superiors and
attested by the CSC.
3. PCOL to PLTGEN- Appointed by the President upon recommendation of the C/PNP, with proper
endorsement by the Chairperson of the CSC.
4. PGEN- Appointed by the President from among the SENIOR OFFICERS, down to the rank of
BGEN.

Page 24 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

HOLDING AND MAINTAINING A COMPETENT WORKFORCE

A. Compensation and Salary Grade -National Budget Circular No. 574

B. Longevity Pay and Allowances

Uniformed personnel of the PNP are entitled to a longevity pay of ten (10%) percent of their
basic monthly salary for every five (5) years of service, which is reckoned from the date of the
personnel’s original appointment. Provided that the totality of such longevity pay shall not exceed fifty
percent (50%) of the basic pay. The likewise entitled the following:
1. Subsistence allowance;
2. Quarter allowance;
3. Clothing allowance;
4. Cost of living allowance;
5. Hazard pay; and
6. All other allowances as provided by existing laws. (Section 71, RA 6975)

Welfare Benefits

1. Health Benefits: PNP Health Benefits

a). Reimbursement of Hospitalization and Reasonable Medical Expenses
b). Mandatory Medical Examination with complete laboratory work up
c). Regular aerobic physical activities
d). Advocacy on lifestyle modification and diet counseling (Section 70, RA 6975 IRR)

2. Permanent Physical Disability Benefits

PNP PCOs and PNCOs, having accumulated at least twenty (20) years of active service, incurs
total permanent physical disability in line of duty are compulsorily retired. If he has accumulated less than
twenty (20) years of active service, he is separated from the service and entitled to a separation pay
equivalent to one and one-fourth months base pay for every year of service, or a fraction thereof, and
longevity pay of the permanent grade he/she holds. (Section 73, RA 6975)

Moreover, a uniformed personnel and/or his heirs shall be entitled to all benefits relative to the
death or permanent incapacity of said personnel, as provided for under RA 6975 and/or other existing
laws. (Section 76, RA 6975)

Grounds for Compensability:

a) For the injury and resulting disability or death to the compensable, the injury must be the result
of an employment accident satisfying ANY of the following reasons:
(1) The PNP member must have been injured at the place of his work requires him to be
and must have been performing his official function;
(2) If the death or injury is sustained elsewhere, the PNP member must have been
executing lawful order from his COP or from his supervisor, as the case maybe;
(3) The death or injury by reason of the performance of his official duty.

b) For the sickness and the resulting disability or death to be compensable, the sickness must be
the result of an occupational disease as determined by the Commission; otherwise proof must be
shown that the risk of contracting the disease is increasing by the working conditions.

3. Retirement Benefits
PNP uniformed personnel are entitled for monthly retirement pay of 50% of the base pay and
longevity pay of the retired grade in case of 20 years of active service, INCEASINGLY by 2.5% for every
year of active service rendered beyond 20 years to a maximum of 90% for 36 years of service and over:
Provided, that the uniformed member has the option to receive in advance and in LUMP SUM
his/her retirement for the first 5 YEARS, which SHALL be made within 6 MONTHS from the effectivity
date of his retirement.

Note:
Retirement pay is subject to adjustments based on the prevailing scale of base pay of police
personnel in active service.

4. Retirement in the Next Higher Grade

5. Special Financial Assistance
6. Exemption from Attachment and Taxes

Recognition and Incentive System

Page 25 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

PNP AWARDS, CITATION BADGES, GRANTING AUTHORITY & INCENTIVES (NAPOLCOM MC NO.
93-018)
AWARDS GRANTING INCENTIVES
AUTHORITY
1. Medalya ng Kagitingan (PNP MEDAL PRESIDENT Scholarship of ALL qualified
OF VALOR) Children at PNPA, P1,000.00 cash
& Parade Honors at GHQ PNP &
HRECOMs
2. Medalya ng Kabayanihan(PNP DILG SECRETARY Scholarship of ONE (1) dependent
DISTINGUISHED CONDUCT MEDAL) at PNPA & P900.00 cash
3. Medalya ng Katapatan sa Paglilingkod DILG SECRETARY Cash of P500.00
(PNP DISTINGUISED SERVICE MEDAL)
4. Medalya ng Katapangan (PNP CHIEF PNP Cash of P500.00
BRAVERY MEDAL)
5. Medalya ng Katangitanging Gawa (PNP CHIEF PNP Tour for two (2) of RECOM Hqs and
OUTSTANDING ACHIEVEMENT MEDAL) Parade Honors at GHQ PNP
6. Medalya ng Pambihirang Paglilingkod CHIEF PNP
(PNP SPECIAL SERVICE MEDAL)
7. Medalya ng Kadakilaan (PNP HEROISM RD/DSS Cash of P400.00
MEDAL)
8. Medalya ng Katangitanging Asal (PNP RD/DSS One week service credits
OUTSTANDING CONDUCT MEDAL)
9. Medalya ng Kagalingan(PNP MEDAL RD/DSS Cash of P200.00 and Service Credit
OF MERIT) og one (1) day
10. Medalya ng Kasanayan(PNP RD/DSS Leave credits of four (4) days
EFFICIENCY MEDAL)
11. Medalya ng Papuri (PNP RD/DSS Leave credit of three (3) days
COMMENDATION MEDAL)
12. Medalya ng Sugatang Magiting(PNP RD/DSS P600.00 cash & leave credit of five
WOUNDED PERSONNEL MEDAL) (5) days
13. Medalya ng Ugnayang RD/DSS Leave credit of three (3) days
Pampulisya(POLICE RELATIONS MEDAL)
14. Medalya ng Mabuting Asal (PNP RD/DSS Leave credit of three (3) days
GOOD CONDUCT MEDAL)
15. Medalya ng Paglilingkod (PNP RD/DSS Service credit of three (3) days
SERVICE MEDAL)
16. Medalya sa Paglaban sa Manililigalig RD/DSS
(ANTI-DISSIDENCE MEDAL)
17. Medalya ng Pagtulong sa mga RD/DSS
Nasalanta(PNP DISASTER RELIEF
REHABILITATION MEDAL)
18. Tsapa sa Natatanging Yunit (PNP CHIEF PNP
UNIT CITATION BADGE)
19. Medalya ng Paglilingkod sa Luzon RD/DSS
(LUZON CAMPAIGN MEDAL)
20. Medalya ng Paglilingkod sa RD/DSS
Visayas(VISAYAS CAMPAIGN MEDAL)
21. Medalya ng Paglilingkod sa Mindanao RD/DSS
(MINDANAO CAMPAIGN MEDAL)
22. Mga Tsapa ng Kuwalipikasyon (PNP RD/DSS
QULAFICATION BADGES)

Note:
For every five (5) letters of commendation a Medalya ng Papuri may be awarded to any PNP
member.

EDUCATION AND TRAINING

1. The Philippine Public Safety College [(PPSC) Sections 66-67 RA 6975]

Component Institutions
a) National Police College (NPC)- the lead agency for commissioned public safety officers
career training.

Page 26 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

b) National Crime Research and Training Institute (NCRTI)- the lead agency for criminological
research and technical training for the public safety services.
c) Philippine National Police Academy (PNPA)-provide preparatory education and training for
the development of potential police, fire and jail officers.
d) Police National Training Institute (PNTI)- the lead agency for police rank and file.
e) Fire National Training Institute (FNTI)- the lead agency for fire service career and specialist
training.
f) Jail National Training Institute (JNTI)- the lead agency for correctional service career and
specialist training.

2. Types of Training in the PNP

a) Basic Recruit Training
A PPSC and NAPOLCOM prescribed training program which is completed for not less
than 6 months and normally consists of 40 hours of scheduled instructions.

b) Field Training: Field Training is where the recruits undergo actual experience and assignment
in patrol, traffic, and investigation as a requirement for permanency. The program shall last for 12 months
inclusive of the PSBRC for PNCO and OOC/OBC for PCO (NAPOLCOM MC No. 2008-005).

c) In-Service Training
JLT (Junior Leadership Training) for Pat to PSSg
SLT (Senior Leadership Training) for PMSg to PEMS
PBC (Police Basic Course) Preparation for Officer’s
Basic Course
OBC (Officer’s Basic Course) for PLT to PMAJ
OAC (Officers Advance Course) for PMAJ to PCOL;
OSEC (Officer Senior Executive Course) for PLTCOL and
above;
DSC (Directorial Staff Course) for PMGEN and others higher
in rank

d) Department In-Service Program

Roll-Call Training. Instructional course of several hours a day
concerning departmental activites.
Supervisory Development, Specialized, or Technical trainings.
It involve seminars or special sessions on criminal
investigation, traffic control, etc.
Other trainings conducted by law enforcement units or agencies

e) National and International Conventions on Policing (NAPOLCOM MC No. 1995-025)

Promotion
The movement upward from one classification or rank to another carrying higher pay and
more responsibility.

Promotion Policy: Promotion of personnel action should be aligned towards: (1) recognition of good
performance in the service; and (2) potential to discharge greater duties and responsibilities in the next
higher degree.

Requirements for Promotion: 1. Education; 2. Experience;

3. Training; and 4. Eligibility

Two-fold Goals of a Sound Promotion Policy

1. Selection for promotion of those persons who are best for increased responsibilities
2. Providing assurance for all employees that sound selection procedures are being followed which are
germane to work objective, and free from any irrelevant considerations such as race, religion, politics or
personal bias

Kinds of Promotion
1. Regular.
Principles
a) Authority of the NAPOLCOM to develop policy on promotion
b) Considerable balance between competence and seniority
c) Corresponding Promotion Board for each rank
d) No person shall be promoted if less than one (1) year in the service

Page 27 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

e) Rank of Inspector and above shall be coursed through the NAPOLCOM for review and
confirmation

2. Special/Meritorious
Principles
a) Exhibited acts of conspicuous courage and gallantry at the risk of his/her life above and
beyond the call of duty
b) Validated by the NAPOLCOM based on established criteria (Sec. 38 (b), RA 6975 as
amended)
c) Applicable even on personnel with temporary appointment (MC No. 2008-002)
d) Must be transmitted to the NAPOLCOM within one (1) year from the time of the occurrence
of the deed

Acts Amounting to Conspicuous Courage and Gallantry

1. A deed of personal bravery and self-sacrifice above and beyond the call of duty, e.g.
overwhelming number and firepower of the enemy against the PNP, infiltration of enemy’s
hideout, shootouts in robbery at the PUVs rescue / disaster operations that save lives.
2. An act of heroism exhibited in the face of an armed enemy or in the conduct of rescue or disaster
operations resulting in the loss of life ( Posthumous Promotion)

Notes:
Only OPERATIONAL accomplishment merits special promotion. It must be supported by
the affidavit of two (2) eyewitness to the deed or act cited; if none by sworn statement of the
immediate superior.

Waiver of Certain Requirements for Special Promotion

1. For Non-Officers (PNCOs)- Educational attainment, eligibility, training and experience.
2. For Officers (PCOs)- Experience (time-and-grade)

3. Promotion by Virtue of Position- promotion given to PNP personnel who was designated to any
key position lower than that of his rank required for such position for the period of more than six (6)
months is entitled to a rank adjustment corresponding to the position. That personnel shall not be
reassigned to a position calling for a higher rank until after two (2) years from the date of such rank
adjustment.

Mandatory Requirements for Promotion

1. Educational Attainment
2. Completion of Appropriate Training Course, such as:
2.1 MNSA or related/allied Masters Degree for BGEN and above;
2.2 OSEC (Officer Senior Executive Course) for PLTCOL to PCOL;
2.3 OAC (Officers Advance Course) for PMAJ;
2.4 OBC (Officers Basic Course) for PLT to PCPT;
2.5 BSPS (Bachelor of Science in Public Safety) for PLT;
2.6 OCC (Officers Candidate Course) for PEMS;
2.7 SLC (Senior Leadership Course) for PSMS to PCMS
2.8 JLC (Junior Leadership Course) for PSSg to PMSg
2.9 PSBRC (Public Safety Basic Recruit Course) for Pat to PCpl
3. Experience/Time-in Grade (NAPOLCOM MC 2013-501)
2 years PCOL to PBGEN
3 years PLTCOL to PCOL
3 years PMAJ to PLTCOL
3 years PCPT to PMAJ
3 years PLT to PCPT
3 years PEMS to PLT
2 years PCMS to PEMS
2 years PSMS to PCMS
2 years PMSg to PSMS
3 years PSSg to PMSg
2 years PCpl to PSSg
2 years Pat to PCpl

Note:

Through NAPOLCOM’s recommendation, the President has the prerogative to promote

PBGEN-PGEN without requiring experience or time-in-grade.

4. Appropriate Eligibility

Page 28 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

NAPOLCOM Examinations
1) Police Entrance Examination
2) Promotional Examination such as for PSg, PLT, PLTCOL & PCOL

Others: RA 6506; RA 1080; PD 907; and CSP

5. Clearance from the People’s Law Enforcement Board (PLEB)

Appointing Authority in Promotion ( NAPOLCOM MC # 93-004)

GRADE AUTHORITY
PGEN President
PCOL-PLTGEN President
PLT-PLTCOL PNP Chief
Pat-PEMS RD/Director of various support groups or services

Police Assignment/Designation and Placement

Police assignment is the process of designating a police officer in a particular functions, duties or
responsibilities. Its purpose is to ensure systematic and effective utilization of all members of the force.
Placement- refers to the selection and designation of an officer to a key positions f responsibility.

Power to Make Designation or Assignment

1. CPNP, RD, PD and COP (Section 26 of RA 6975)
2. Governor and Mayor (Sections 51, 62-64 of RA 6975

Assignment of Officers Appointed via Lateral Entry

Line Officers. They are assigned to the PROs where they applied for lateral entry. Line
Officers are PCOs who are mandated to perform essential and purely police functions, i.e. law
enforcement, crime prevention and investigation, intelligence, internal security operations, and
relative administrative work who were originally commissioned and/or absorbed into the PNP by the
virtue of RA 6975, and SPOIVs promoted to the rank of Inspector.

Technical Services Officers. They will be assigned exclusively to the technical services of
the PNP where they were recruited or commissioned. They are exempted from taking mandatory officers
training course but require to take career service courses relative to their field of specialization to enhance
their professional advancement and service efficiency (MC 94-019). Technical Service Officers are
PCOs who were originally commissioned to the PNP, either directly or through lateral entry, by virtue of
their special technical skills and competencies, such as: medical officers, dentists, nurses,
lawyers, priests and pastors, forensic specialists, licensed criminologists, nutritionists, etc.

SEPARATION FROM THE SERVICE

1. Attrition: maybe defined as a separation from the PNP due to natural course of events or
circumstances which the law may be provided. Section 24 of RA 8551 provides that “there shall be
established an established system of Attrition within the Uniformed Members of the PNP within one (1)
year from the effectivity of this Act to be submitted by the PNP to the Commission for approval. Such
attrition system shall include but is not limited to the provisions of the following sections “.

Notes:

The subsequent provisions of RA 8551 concerning attrition such as Sections 25, 26, 27, 28, 29
and 30 provide guidelines on its implementation which the NAPOLCOM is mandated to perform.

Kinds of Attrition

a). Attrition by attainment of maximum tenure in position

POSITION MAXIMUM TENURE

Chief 4 years
Deputy Chief 4 years
Director of Staff Services 4 years
Regional Directors 6 years
Provincial/City directors 9 years

Notes:

Page 29 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

Pursuant to the Administrative Control power of the NAPOLCOM over the PNP, the following
Maximum tenure of the following third level PCOs are hereby provided:

b). Attrition by relief

Relieved for just cause and not given an assignment within 2 years after relief.

c). Attrition by demotion in position

Assigned in a position lower than his/her grade within 18 months after such demotion in
position.

d). Attrition by non-promotion

Non promotion for a continuous period of 10 years despite of the existence of vacant position.

e). Attrition by other means such as:

a) Inefficiency based on poor performance during two successive annual rating periods;
b) Inefficiency based on poor performance during three cumulative annual rating periods;
c) Physical and mental incapacity to perform police functions and duties;
d) Failure to pass the required entrance examination twice and/or finish the required career courses
except for justifiable reasons;
e) Refusal to take periodic PNP Physical Fitness Test without justifiable reasons;
f) Failure to take the PNP Physical Fitness Test for four consecutive periodic tests due to health
reasons
g) Failure to pass PNP Physical Fitness Test for two consecutive periodic test or four cumulative
periodic tests
h) Non-compliance with the minimum qualification standards for permanency or original
appointment.

Effect of Attrition to the Employment of Police Officer with the PNP

1. RETIRED if he or she has rendered at least twenty (20) years of service.
2. SEPARATED if he or she has rendered less than twenty (20) years of service unless the
personnel is disqualified by law to receive such benefits

2. Retirement
Kinds
a) Compulsory. A retirement for PCO and PNCO of the PNP upon the attainment of age
FIFTY(56) SIX.
b). Optional- A retirement requested by the PNP PCO and PNCO upon accumulation of at
LEAST TWENTY (20) YEARS of satisfactory service, subject to the approval of NAPOLCOM.

3. Death and Permanent Physical Disability

Disability- the loss or impairment of the normal functions of the physical or mental faculties of an
employee which reduces his/her capacity to continue with his present employment( NAPOLCOM Mc No.
2001-006)
Permanent Total Disability- any impairment of the mind or body which renders the disabled PNP
member incapable of performing substantially the duties of a police officer and which is expected to be
long, continued, and of definite duration, such as loss of power of speech, sense of hearing, loss of one or
both hands and feet.

4. Disciplinary Action [(Dismissal) NAPOLCOM MC No. 2002-013]

The dismissal from the service of a police officer shall result to the cancellation of his eligibility,
retirement benefits, and disqualification for reemployment in the police service; and the confiscation of his
service firearms and other paraphernalia to be confiscated by the COP where he was assigned or by his
immediate commander tasked to implement the order.

5. Missing Person
Any uniformed personnel who, while in the performance of duty or by reason of his being an
officer of the PNP, BFP, BJMP, is officially confirmed missing in action, kidnapped or captured by lawless
elements shall, while so absent, be entitled to receive or to have credited to his account the same pay
and allowances to which such officer or uniformed member was entitled at the time of the incident:
PROVIDED, That the compulsory retirement of a person missing in action shall be processed to allow the
members of the next of kin to enjoy the retirement benefits: PROVIDED, FURTHER, That should the
CPNP, BPF,BJMP as the case may be, upon the recommendation of the proper authority and/or
immediate supervisor, subsequently determine that the officer or uniformed member concerned or his
heirs shall reimburse the PNP, BFP or BJMP all such amount and allowances received by him. (Section
78, RA 6975)

Page 30 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

6. Transfer
It is a movement from one position to another which is of equivalent rank, level or salary without
break in service. In the PNP, reassignment, transfer or relief of PNP personnel is not a disciplinary action
which would require prior investigation or observance of due process. It can be effected by the
commander concerned at his discretion but only when the exigency of the service so requires or as may
be necessary to effectively carry out the functions/powers and duties of the PNP. (NAPOLCOM MC No.
2002-007)

7. Performance of a Prohibited Acts

As professional police, fire and jail officers and members responsible for the maintenance of
peace and order and public safety, members and officers of the PNP, BFP and BJMP are prohibited from
engaging in strikes, rallies, demonstrations and other similar concerted activities, or performing other acts
prejudicial to good order and police discipline.

POLICE EXAMINATION SYSTEM

The NAPOLCOM shall administer the entrance and promotional examinations for policemen. It
shall also design and establish qualifications upgrading program for the members in coordination with
CSC, and the CHED through a distance education program and/or an in-service education program or
other similar programs. (Sec. 19, RA 8551)
1. NAPOLCOM Examinations (NAPOLCOM MC No. 2000-007)
1) PNP Entrance Examination
2) Police Officer Examination
3) Senior Police Officer Examination
4) Police Inspector Examination
5) Police Superintendent Examination
2. Licensure Examinations for Criminologists (RA 6506)
3. Bar and Board Examinations of Baccalaureate Degree (RA 1080)
4. CSC Professional

POLICE CADETSHIP PROGRAM (NAPOLCOM 2008-001)

Cadetship program of the PNP is administered by the Philippine National Police Academy
(PNPA) which was originally established by virtue of Section 19, Presidential Decree 1184 otherwise
known as the INP Professionalization Law of 1977.

Privileges After Graduation(MC 2008-001)

1. Automatic appointment as Commissioned Officer of the PNP, BFP and BJMP with the rank of
Inspector
2. Testimonial eligibility for the purpose of such automatic appointment. However, it cannot be used
for promotion. (MC 96-008)
3. Exemptions from mandatory Field Training Program (FTP)

COMPARATIVE POLICE SYSTEM

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Definitions
Comparative Police System. The science and art of investigating and comparing the police
system of nations, which covers the study of their police organizations, trainings and methods of policing.
Comparative Criminal Justice. Field of criminal justice which deals with comparing the
similarities and differences of criminal justice in terms of structure, goals, punishment and emphasis on
rights as well as history, and political structure of different systems.

B. Types of Police System

1. Common Law Systems. Usually exists in English speaking countries. Characterized by strong
adversarial system and rely upon oral system of evidence in which the public trial is a main focal point.
Also known as “Anglo-American Justice”.
2. Civil Law Systems. Characterized by strong inquisitorial system where less right is granted to
the accused and the written law is taken as gospel and subject to little interpretation. Also known as
“Continental Justice or Romano-Germanic Justice”
3. Socialist System. Known as Marxist-Leninist Justice which is practiced in Africa and Asia . It
is characterized by procedures designed to rehabilitate the offender.
4. Islamic System. This system is based more on the concept of natural justice or customary law
or tribal traditions.

Page 31 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

C. Types of Police Models in the World

1. Fragmented Police System- Found in the US; directly attributed to the federated nature of the
political system and local communities asserting their right to home rule.
2. Combined Police System- Marked by the national and local governments cooperating and
sharing in the responsibility for establishing a police service.
3. National Centralized Police System- Originated in Rome, it is necessitated the central
government creating a police force for the community.

II. GLOBALIZATION AND ITS EFFECTS TO POLICING

A. Definition

Globalization. The process by which regional economies, societies, and culture, as well as
information, ideas and even authority become integrated by a global network of political ideas through
communication, transportation, and trade.

The increasing interconnectedness of different parts of the world through common process of
economic, environmental, political and cultural change.

B. Effects of Globalization to Policing

1. Transnational crime activities are facilitated
2. Need for transnational policing , hence cooperation among police organizations in the world is vital
3. Training instruction for law enforcement officers must include the use of updated technology
4. Development of a new strategies to deal with transnational organized crime groups
5. Updated laws related to law enforcement based on the contemporary theories of crime causation

III. TRANSNATIONAL CRIMES

A. Definition

Transnational Crime. An activity that is considered criminal offense by at least two countries. It is an
offense that inception, prevention and/or indirect effects involved more than one country.
 Crimes that by their nature involve boarder crossing as an essential part of the criminal activity.
 Crimes that take place in one country, but its consequences significantly affect another country.

B. Types of Transnational Crimes

1. Terrorism - Any act intended to cause death or serious bodily harm to civilians or non-combatants with
the purpose of:
1. Intimidating a population of serious bodily harm; and
2. Compelling a government or an international organization to do or abstain doing any act. [ UN
Panel- 03-17-05]

2. Drug Trafficking - A global illicit trade involving the cultivation, manufacture, distribution and sale of
substances which are subject to drug prohibition laws.

3. Money Laundering - Process through which the existence of an illegal source of unlawful application
of illicit gains is concealed or disguised to make the gains legitimate, thereby helping to evade detection,
prosecution, seizure and taxation.
Historical Background of Money Laundering
Money laundering originated in the 1920’s when the American mafia owned Laundromats which
were cash businesses.
Criminals then used this Laundromats to hide illegal proceeds by investing said money in the
Laundromats business, or mixing illicit funds with clean money.
In 1986, The United States passed the Money Laundering Control Act (MLCA).
In 1988 the United Nations Convention against Illicit Trafficking in Narcotic Drugs and
Psychotropic Substances (VIENNA CONVENTION) made drug money laundering a criminal offense
In 1989 The G-7 Nations (France, Germany, Italy, Japan, United Kingdom, United States, and
Canada) formed the FINANCIAL ACTION TASK FORCE (FATF) which were mandated to devise
international standards and policies to combat money laundering.
And in 2000 the United Nations Convention against Transnational Organized Crime (PALERMO
CONVENTION) extended the legal definition of money laundering to include all serious crimes.

Page 32 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

4. Human Trafficking -The recruitment, transport, transfer, harboring or receipt of a person by such
means as threat or use of force or other forms of coercion, abduction, fraud or deception for the purpose
of exploitation. It differs from human smuggling for the latter is mainly about the illegal entry of a person
into a State, and it is understood to include an element of “consent” or willingness

Core Elements of the Concept of Trafficking

1. The action of trafficking which means the recruitment, transportation, transfer, harboring or
receipt of persons;
2. The means of trafficking which includes threat of or the use of force, deception, coercion,
abuse of power or position of vulnerability;
3. The purpose of trafficking is always exploitation

5. Cyber Crimes - The commission of a criminal acts using the instruments of modern technology such
as computers and the internet.

Emerging Forms of Cybercrimes

1. Internet Crimes such as internet-based pornography, selling pornographic materials, bogus
get-rich schemes, weight-loss scams etc.
2. Internet Securities Fraud such as market manipulation, fraudulent offerings of security and
illegal touting, i.e. an individual makes securities recommendations and fail to disclose that they are being
paid to disseminate their favorable opinions.
3. Identity Theft which occurs when a person uses the Internet to steal someone’s identity and/or
impersonate them to open a new credit card account or conduct some other financial transactions.

C. Global Response Against TC

1. UN Convention Against Transnational Crime

Features:
1.1 Creation of domestic criminal offenses to combat the problem;
1.2 Adoption of new, sweeping frameworks for mutual legal assistance, extradition, law enforcement
cooperation, technical assistance and training.

2. UN Protocols on Specific Areas of Transnational Organized Crime

Features:
2.1 Protocol to prevent, suppress and punish trafficking in persons, especially women and children;
2.2 Protocol against smuggling of migrants by land, air and sea; and
2.3 Protocol against the illicit manufacturing of and trafficking of firearms, its parts, components and
ammunition.

D. Philippine Response Against TC

1. The creation of Philippine Center for Transnational Crime (PCTC); and
2. Legislative responses resulting to the creation of special agencies that address problems on
transnational crimes.

E. The Philippine Center for Transnational Crime (PCTC)

 Executive Order No.62 Series of 1999 (January 15,1999) - PCTC is created to establish a
shared database among concerned agencies for information on criminals, methodologies, arrest
and conviction on transnational crime in all its forms.
 Executive Order No.100 Series of 1999 (May 7, 1999), Executive No.295 (September 28,
2002) and Executive Order No.146 (October 22, 2002) - strengthen the operational ,
administrative and information support system of the PCTC.

FUNCTIONS OF THE PCTC

Exercise general supervision and control over the following:
1. Loop Center of the National Action Committee on Anti- Hijacking and Terrorism (NACAHT)
2. International Criminal Police Organization ICPO-INTERPOL-NCB Manila, which serves as the
national liaison office and main coordinating body for international police cooperation against
transnational crime.
3. Police attache of the Philippine National Police, and
4. Political attache/counselors for security matters of the DILG.

Four Major Concerns of PCTC

1. Information Exchange
2. Strategic Studies
3. Capacity Building

Page 33 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

4. Law Enforcement Coordination

PCTC’s Command and Control

1. The PCTC is under the office of the President but placed under the general supervision and
control of the National Security Adviser;
2. The Executive Director has immediate supervision and control over all units of PCTC, and
authorized to designate duties and functions of all its units and Personnel;
3. The Executive Director has direct operational and supervisory authority over personnel and
resources detailed with PCTC.
 
Legislative Responses Against Transnational Crimes

A. Public Safety and Terrorism

1. RA 9372 - Human Security Act of 2007
2. RA 6969 - Toxic Substances and Hazardous and Nuclear Waste Control Act of 1990
3. Arts. 122-123, RPC, PD 532 - Anti - Piracy and Anti-Highway Robbery Law of 1974, RA
6235- Anti- Hijacking Law
4. PD 1866 as amended by RA 8294 and RA 10591- Decree Codifying the Law on
Illegal/Unlawful Possession, Manufacture, Dealing In, Acquisition or Disposition of Firearms,
Ammunition and Explosives
5. R.A. 9851- Philippine Act on Crimes Against International Humanitarian Law, Genocide and
Other Crimes Against Humanity
6. RA 10168- Terrorism Financing, Prevention and Suppression Act
  
B. Trafficking of Human Beings
1. RA 9208 - Anti - Trafficking in Persons Act of 2003
2. RA 8042 - Migrant Workers and Overseas Filipino Workers Act (Illegal Recruitment)
3. RA 8043 - Inter - Country Adoption Act
4. RA 6955 - Anti - Mail Order Bride Act
5. RPC, Article 272 – Slavery
6. RPC, Article 341 - White Slave Trade

C. Financial and High-Tech Crimes

1. RA 9160 as amended by RA 9194,
RA10167, & 10365 - Anti - Money Laundering Act of 2001
2. RA 4200 - Anti - Wire Tapping Law 
3. Republic Act No. 10175- Cybercrime Act of 2012.
D. Drug Trafficking/Smuggling 
1. RA 9165 - The Comprehensive Dangerous Drug Act of 2002, as amended by RA 10640

IV. SELECTED POLICE MODELS

A. POLICE SYSTEMS OF ASEAN COUNTRIES

BRUNEI
Organizational Name: ROYAL BRUNEI POLICE FORCE
Agency: Polis Diraja Brunei (PDRB)/Home Affairs Ministry, under the Sultan of Brunei who serves
as Prime Minister, Ministers of Defense, Finance and Chancellor of the National University
Structure: Centralized
Founded: 1921
Entrance Age: 18 years old
Retirement age: 60 years old
Minimum Rank: Lance Corporal
Highest Rank: Inspector General of the Police/Inspector General
Minimum Qualification: Required to possess at least the Brunei Junior Certificate of
Education(BJCE); 5’ 6” and 5’4” in height for male and female; 60 kgs for men and 55 kgs for women.
Training: 9 months, and in-service trainings
Mission: To maintain law and order in accordance with powers conferred by any written law of the
land in most professional manner

CAMBODIA
Organizational Name: CAMBODIAN NATIONAL POLICE
Agency: Ministry Of Internal Affairs/Ministry of Interior
Structure: Centralized
Founded: 1945
Entrance Age: 23-36
Retirement age: 65

Page 34 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

Minimum Rank: Staff Sergeant

Highest Rank: General
Minimum Qualification: High school graduate; 5’5” in height for male and 5’3” for female.
Training: Rigorous combative training in Cambodian Police Camp
Mission: Working together to serve and protect the people

INDONESIA
Organization Name: INDONESIAN NATIONAL POLICE (POLRI) KEPOLISIAN NEGARA
REPUBLIC INDONESIA
Agency: Under Secretary for Public Diplomacy and Public Affairs
Organizational Structure: Centralized national bureaucracy with regional police organization
parallels exactly the hierarchy of the Indonesian Civic Administration.
Entrance Age: 18 years old
Retirement age: 45 years old up to 58
Minimum Rank: Second Bhayangkara
Highest Rank: Police General
Minimum Qualification: High school graduate; passed competitive exam; Voluntary military service;
2 years conscript service obligation to age 45; Indonesia citizens only
Training: 11 Months
Mission: Provide protection, shelter and services to the public so than community is free from
physical disturbance; provide guidance to the public through preemptive and preventive efforts, can
raise awareness and strength as well as compliance with public law; and enforcing the law in a
professional and proportionate to uphold the rule of law and human rights leading to the existence of
legal certainty and justice.

LAOS
Organizational Name: ROYAL LAO POLICE
Agency: Ministry of Public Safety
Organization Structure: Centralized under the Ministry of Public Security
Founded: 1961
Entrance Age: 18 years old
Retirement age:
Minimum Rank: Patrolman/Sip
Highest Rank: Major General-Director of the Royal Lao Polic
Minimum Qualification: No formal educational requirements; open to to graduates and non
graduates with nationally agreed competency-based framework
Training: 12 weeks or 3 months
Mission: Ensure nationwide security social order and the prevention, detection and investigation of
crime.

MALAYSIA
Organizational Name: ROYAL MALAYSIAN POLICE (RMP) POLIS DIRAJA MALAYSIA
Agency: Ministry of Home Affairs
Structure: Centralized command under the Inspector General of the Police
Founded: 1967
Entrance Age: 18-28 years old
Retirement age: 60 years old
Minimum Rank: Constable (PC)
Highest Rank: Inspector General of Police (IGP)
Minimum Qualification:
Training: 6 months for physical development
Mission: Leading enforcement agency of integrity, competent and committed to work with the
community

MYANMAR

Organizational Name: MYANMAR POLICE FORCE/PEOPLE’S POLICE FORCE

Agency: Ministry of Home Affairs
Structure: Centralized
Founded: 1964 reorganized in 1995
Entrance Age: 18 years old
Retirement age: 60 years old
Minimum Rank: Police Lance Corporal
Highest Rank: Police major General
Minimum Qualification: 5’6” in height for men and 5’4” for women; 65kgs for men and 56 kgs for
women

Page 35 of 139
CRIMINOLOGIST LICENSURE EXAMINATION
Law Enforcement Administration
Review Notes Prepared by Dean RODOLFO V. CASTILLO JR. RCrim., Ph.D., LPT

Training: 9 months training for lance corporal

Mission:

PHILIPPINES

Organizational Name: Philippine National Police

Agency: National Police Commission
Structure: Centralized under the Office of the President through the NAPOLCOM
Founded: 1991
Entrance Age: 21-30
Retirement age: 56
Minimum Rank: Police Officer 1
Highest Rank: Director General
Minimum Qualification: Baccalaureate Degree
Training: 12 months (6 months PSBRC and 6 months FTP on patrol traffic and investigation)
Mission: Enforce the law, prevent and control crimes, maintain peace and order, and ensure public
safety and internal security with the active support of the community

SINGAPORE

Organizational Name: Singapore Police Force

Agency: Ministry of Internal Affairs
Structure: Centralized
Founded: 1946
Entrance Age: 18-30 years old
Retirement age: 50 years old
Minimum Rank: Police Constable
Highest Rank: Commissioner of Police
Minimum Qualification: University degrees and post graduate degrees
Training: 6 months
Mission: Protect the people who live in Singapore from crime and all manner of criminal harm and all
manner of criminal harm

THAILAND

Organizational Name: ROYAL THAI POLICE (SAMNAK NGAN TAMRUAT HAENG CHAT)
Agency: Ministry of Interior
Structure: Centralized
Founded: 1932
Entrance Age: 14-18 years old for high school applicant; 18-35 for college graduates applicants
Retirement age: 50 years old
Minimum Rank: Policeman/ Constable
Highest Rank: Police General
Minimum Qualification: High school graduate for rank and file level; Grade 10 for pre-cadet force
and 4 years degree for sub-inspector; 5’6 in height for male and 5’4’ for female; 65 kgs for men, 55 kgs for
female.
Training: Training on patrol, traffic control techniques, investigation and arrest techniques
Mission: Service oriented police organization
Note: Ranking System of RTP/TNDP is Militaristic Style in descending order. Also, there are two
levels of entry to the the police service: Rank-and-file level and sub-inspector-level

Page 36 of 139
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

VIETNAM

Organizational Name: REPUBLIC OF VIETNAM NATIONAL POLICE (RVNP)

Agency: Ministry of Defense
Structure: Centralized Structure under the Vietnamese Communist Party
Founded: 1962
Entrance Age: 18-28 old and must have university degrees and postgraduate degrees.
Retirement age: 50 years old
Minimum Rank: Private/Constable
Highest Rank: General, which held only by
Minimum Qualification: 5’6” in height for male and 5’4” for female
Mission: Working to prevent, investigate and solve environmental, political, traffic, functional
and corruption related criminal activities in keeping with the laws of the Socialist Republic.

B. AMERICAN, AUSTRALIAN, EUROPEAN AND OTHER ASIAN POLICE MODELS

AUSTRALIA

Organizational Name: AUSTRALIAN FEDERAL POLICE (AFP)

Agency: Home Affairs Ministry
Structure: Centralized; federal police agency of the Commonwealth of Australia
Founded: 1979
Entrance Age: Over 18 years of age
Retirement age: 52
Minimum Rank: Constable
Highest Rank: Commissioner
Minimum Qualification: No height requirement so long as healthy; Year 12 Certificate or
Year 10 trade certificate or its equivalent;; full manual vehicle driver’s license; confirmation of
ability to swim 100 meters freestyle non-stop and unaided
Training: 24 weeks live-in training, with occasional weekend and evening work including
exercises at the shooting range and night operational simulations, and 12 months OJT.
Mission: Keep the peace and preserve public safety within the Australian Capital Territory;
and work to achieve this by providing quality police services in partnership with the community.

CANADA
Organizational Name: ROYAL CANADIAN MOUNTED POLICE
Agency: Minister of Public Safety
Structure: Centralized under the authority of Canadian Parliament
Founded:
Entrance Age: 19 years of age
Retirement age: 50
Minimum Rank: Constable
Highest Rank: Commissioner
Minimum Qualification: 5’6” in height for male and 5’4” for female; 56 kgs for men and 55
kgs for women.
Training: 6 months
Mission: Preserve the peace, uphold the law and provide quality service in partnership with
the community.

CHINA

CHINA POLICE SYSTEM

Police Structure
1. Public Security Police. The largest and oldest components of Chinese Police as to its
organizational hierarchy it is consist of:
a) Ministry of Public Security. Responsible for making nationwide regulations
concerning the law enforcement procedures, recruitment procedures, recruitment
standards, training requirements, an d promotion criteria. It represents the central
government in directing and regulating police work throughout the country.
b) Provincial Public Security. Accountable to the ministry of public security in the
provincial level, at the same time, accountable to the provincial government.
C) Grassroots Level Public Security Bureaus. Accountable to both higher level
public security bureaus and the people’s government. It also performs duties
related to handling of convicted offenders in cooperation with prison police;
Public Security Police, supervising offenders serving community sentences
such as probation and parole and Prison Police, supervising incarcerated
offenders who is under the leadership of the Ministry of the Justice.

37 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

1. Special Public Security Police. Bound by rules and regulation issued by the
Ministry of Public Security but considered part of and under the direct leadership of
the corresponding government ministries.
a) Railway Police - maintains orders in trains and stations
b) Transportation Police - provides security in waterway transportation
c) Civil Aviation Police - maintains order in airports and provides for civilian Air
Transportation
d) Forest Police - patrol the national forest to prevent forest fires, illegal cutting,
and other activities by State Forest Law

2. People’s Armed Police. Functions include patrol, maintaining security and order in
border areas, guarding high-ranking government officials and foreign dignitaries and
providing security for important government building and facilities. It is under the joint
command of the Ministry of Public Security and Central Military Committee.

3. State Security Police. Established in 1983, it is responsible to protect state security

by preventing foreign espionage, sabotage and conspiracies. Under the leadership of
the Ministry of the State Security, State Security Bureaus are established in all
provinces and some municipalities that have frequent contacts with foreign countries.

Ranking System
The People’s Police Ranking Regularities of 1992 Established the Following Police
Ranks:
Highest- General Superintendent (conferred on individuals who hold minister-level
government post)
Lowest - Officer (first and second grade)

HONGKONG

HONGKONG POLICE FORCE

Formed on 1 May 1844, HKPF is the world's second, and Asia's first, police agency to
operate with a modern policing system.

In 1969, Queen Elizabeth II granted the Royal Charter to Hong Kong Police Force for its
effective handling of the 1967 Hong Kong riots — renaming it Royal Hong Kong Police
Force. After the return of sovereignty to China the Force is once again named the Hong
Kong Police Force

Structure HKPF
Commanded by the Commissioner of Police and assisted by two deputy
commissioners; Deputy Commissioner – Operations which supervises all operational
matters including crime and Deputy Commissioner – Management which is responsible
for the direction and coordination of force management including personnel, training, and
management services.

Motto: We Serve with Pride and Care

RANKING SYSTEM
Highest - Commissioner of Police (CP)
Lowest - Police Constable (PC)

TAIWAN

TAIWAN POLICE FORCE

A unified police force of Taiwan administered under the supervision of NATIONAL

POLICE AGENCY directly under the MINISTRY OF INTERIOR. TPF is under effective
civilian control.

Types
1. Administration Police- generally referred to those who are required to wear uniforms to
carry out duties of household visits, patrolling, raid, guarding, duty officer, and reserves.
2. Traffic Police- primarily charge to keep traffic order, to ensure
traffic safety, to prevent traffic accidents, and to smooth traffic flow.
3. Special Police- those who are responsible for protecting the Central

38 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Government, establishing contingent plans and assisting local and specialized police
units in maintaining public order.
4. Criminal Investigation Police- primarily tasked to prevent and detect
crimes.
5. Specialized Police- tasked mainly to protect state-run enterprises and
public facilities like railways, highways, airports, harbors, MRT and Bank of Taiwan.

Ranking System
Highest - Police Supervisor General
Lowest - Police Rank Four

FRANCE

Organizational Name: FRANCE’S NATIONAL POLICE (POLICE NATIONALE)

Agencies 1. The National Police – the main civil law enforcement agency of France, with
primary jurisdiction in cities and large towns. The National Police comes under the jurisdiction
of the Ministry of the Interior . Formed in 1966
2. The  Gendarmerie- military elements, with primary jurisdiction in smaller towns
and rural and border areas. Under the Ministry of National Defense.
Structure: Centralized
Founded:
Entrance Age: 17-35 years of age, in good health and with good eyesight
Retirement age:
Minimum Rank: Keeper of the Peace/Sub-Officer Cadet
Highest Rank: Director of the Active Services/Army General
Minimum Qualification: French Baccalaureate Degree and a clean criminal record; 5’6” in
height for male and 5’3” for female
Training: 10 months

ISRAEL
Organizational Name: ISRAEL POLICE (MISHTERET YISTRAEL)
Mishteret Yisrael is the civilian police force of Israel. Its duties include crime fighting,
traffic control, maintaining public safety, and counter-terrorism.
Agency: Minister of Public Security under the jurisdiction of the prime Minister
Structure: Centralized
Entrance Age: 18-45 years old
Retirement age:
Minimum Rank: Constable/ Shoter
Highest Rank: Commissioner/Rav Nitzav
Minimum Qualification: High school graduate; 5’5” in height for male and 5’3” for female
Mission: Crime fighting, traffic control, maintaining public safety, and counter-terrorism.

JAPAN

Official Name: NATIONAL POLICE AGENCY/Keisatsuch (NPA)

Organizational Structure: Centralized
Department/Agency: National Public Safety Commission which exercises administrative
supervision over the NPA; and under the jurisdiction of the Prime Minister
Recruitment and Selection: High school or college graduate.
Appointing Authority: National Public Safety Commission with the approval of the Prime
Minister
Training: 12 months training for high school graduates; 6 months training for college graduates
Ranking System:
Highest - Commissioner General (Keisatsucho Chokan)- Chief of the NPA
Lowest - Police Officer (Junsa)-Prefectural Police Officer’s career start from this rank
Mission: Protecting people’s lives and properties and suppressing crimes and
maintaining the public safety and order of the country.

Methods of Policing and Known Best Practices:

1. Community police officer
2. Koban and Chazaisho
3. Community police activities
4. Vigilance at the Koban
5. Routine visits to homes and workplace
6. Counseling services for citizens
7. Mobile units of community police
8. Emergency response “DIAL110”

39 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

KOREA
Organizational Name: (South) KOREAN NATIONAL POLICE AGENCY (KNP)
Agency: Ministry of Government Administration and Home Affairs
Structure: Centralized
Founded: 1999
Entrance Age:
Retirement age:
Minimum Rank: Police Officer
Highest Rank: Commissioner General
Minimum Qualification: High school graduates
Training: 6 months drills, physical training, preliminary education and OJT
Mission: Crime prevention, traffic control, maintenance of law and order, fight against
transnational Crimes

RUSSIA

Organizational Name: RUSSIAN POLICE

Agency: Ministry of Internal Affairs/Ministry of the Interior
Structure: Centralized
Founded: 2011
Entrance Age:
Retirement age:
Minimum Rank: Police Private
Highest Rank: General of the Police of the Russian Federation
Minimum Qualification: High school graduates
Training:
Mission:

SWEDEN

Organizational Name: SWEDISH POLICE (POLISEN)

Agency: Minister of Justice
Structure: Centralized
Founded: 1925
Entrance Age: 20 years old
Retirement age: 75 years old
Minimum Rank: Police Constable
Highest Rank: National Police Commissioner
Minimum Qualification: Have taken University entrance or have al least 6 months on
University study, driver’s license, able to swim
Training: 2 years and 6-month workplace at a local police authority as Police Trainee
Mission: To reduce crime and increase public safety

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA (USA)

Structure: Decentralized/Fragmented
Types of US Police System
1. Municipal Police. Include village, township, city and country police departments,
sheriff departments, and a variety of special purpose agencies like transit authority
and housing authority police. Typically it has general policing duties for their
respective jurisdiction.

Types of Local Police:

a. County Sheriff Office- has jurisdiction over large areas and in charged with
the operation of a county jail, civil functions such as service of eviction
notices and other court orders and police responsibility.
b. City Police – most common local police organization. It has jurisdiction over
matters that occur in an incorporated municipality.

2. State Police. Highway patrol which typically given the task of regulating traffic and
maintaining order and safety on state federal highways. In many States part of its
broader mandate is providing general police service to people living in
unincorporated areas. Special investigative agencies that concentrate on statewide
law enforcement is also one of the State Police. .

40 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

3. Federal Police. Police agencies operate by federal government at the national level,
which most of these have limited responsibilities and do not provided general police
service to citizens

4. Private Police. Secure additional police protection to private entities by employing

sworn public police officers through a contract when they are not officially on duty for
their public employees.

Minimum Qualification: High school Diploma, or if necessary, College degree

Ranking System:
Highest - Chief of Police/Police Commissioner/Superintendent/Sheriff
Assistant Chief of Police/Assistant Commissioner/Deputy
Superintendent/Chief
Lowest - Officer/Deputy/Corporal
Functions/Mission: Service delivery; law enforcement and order maintenance

Federal Agencies that Specific/Special Police Functions:

1. Protection of Life, Property and Enforcement of Penal Statutes
1.1 The Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI – Department of Justice) –
it investigates all violations of Federal Law except those where
enforcement authority has been specifically assigned to some other
Federal Agency; also investigates all cases of espionage, sabotage,
treason and other matters pertaining to internal security.
1.2 United States Secret Service (Department of Treasury) – chiefly
concerned with investigating the counterfeiting, forging, or altering of
any of the money or other securities of the U.S.A.; also charged with
the protection of the President and his family; and of the Executive
Mansion Grounds.
1.3 Bureau of Narcotics (Department of Treasury) – investigates all
violations of Federal laws relating to narcotic drugs and marijuana
1.4 Bureau of the Chief Post Office Inspector – investigates mail losses,
mail depredations, unlawful use of marks, and other violation of the
postal laws.
1.5 Immigration and Naturalization Service (Dept. of Justice) –
investigates violation of immigration and naturalization laws, patrols
borders to prevent surreptitious entry of aliens, and registers and
fingerprints aliens.

2. Protection of the National Revenue

2.1 Intelligence Unit of the Bureau of Internal Revenue (Dept. of
Treasury) concerned primarily with the investigations of violation of
income tax laws.
2.2 Alcohol Tax Unit of the Bureau of Internal Revenue (Dept. of
Treasury) investigates violation of internal revenue laws relating to
liquors.
2.3 Division of Investigation and Patrol, Bureau of Customs (Dept. of
Treasury) investigates smuggling activities and enforces customs and
navigation laws.

UNITED KINGDOM OF GREAT BRITAIN

UNITED KINGDOM POLICE SYSTEM

Organizational Name: Metropolitan Police
Agency: Minister of Defense
Structure: Decentralized
Founded: 1829 by Sir ROBERT PEEL merged with River Thames Marine Police Force and
Bow Street Horse Patrol
Entrance Age: 18 years old
Retirement age: 57 years old
Ranking System
Highest - Chief Constable
Lowest - Police Constable
Minimum Qualification: Certificate of Knowledge Policing (CKP); no minimum and
maximum height requirements; British or EU citizen or a Commonwealth citizen, or foreign
national with indefinite leave to remain in the UK; physically and mentally able to undertake police
duties.
Mission: Working together for a safer London

41 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Vision:
Make London the safest global city
Be the best crime fighters, by any measure
Earn the trust and confidence of every community
Take pride in the quality of service

V. The UNITED NATIONS [UN]

The UN Charter

The closest to a Constitution that basically governs the relations of international persons.
Technically, it a TREATY, a contract which the parties must respect under the doctrine of “pacta
sunt servanda”.

Purposes of the UN
1. Prevention of war.
2. Maintenance of international peace.
3. Development of friendly relations among the members of the international Community.
4. Attainment of international cooperation and harmony in the actions of nations.

Principal Organs of the UN

1. General Assembly. Consist of all the organization, each of which is entitled to send not
more than five representatives and five alternates.
Functions:
a) Deliberative- initiating studies and making recommendations for the development of
the International Law
b) Supervisory- receiving and considering annual and special reports from another
organs.
c) Financial- approval and apportionment of the budget.
d) Elective- election of non-permanent members of the security council.
e) Constituent- admission of members and the amendments of charter.

2. Security Council. Key organ in the maintenance of international peace and security.
Composed of FIVE (5) PERMANENT members, namely: CHINA, FRANCE, RUSSIA,
the UNITED KINGDOM OF GREAT BRITAIN and the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA;
and TEN (10) ELECTIVE members, elected for two years by the General Assembly.
Functions:
a) Preventive Action- consist of provisional measures to prevent a conflict from
worsening, and may involve the deployment of PEACEKEEPING and/or OBSERVER
missions.
b) Enforcement Actions- consist in the deployment of air, sea and land forces, or in
the institution of blockade.

3. Economic and Social Council. Composed of fifty-four (54) members elect by the
General assembly for a three-year term. Exerts efforts towards the following:
a) Higher standards of living
b) Condition of economic and social progress and development.
c) Solutions of international economic, social, health and related problems
d) Universal respect for and observance of human rights and fundamental freedoms.

4. Trusteeship Council. Charged with the duty of assisting the Security Council and the
General Assembly in the administration of the International Trusteeship system.

5. Secretariat. The Chief administrative organ of the UN; headed by the SECRETARY
GENERAL who is chosen by the General Assembly upon recommendation of the
Security Council. The SECRETARY GENERAL is the HIGHEST representative of UN.
The Secretary General and his staff are INTERNATIONAL CIVIL SERVANTS.

6. International Court Of Justice. Principal judicial organ of the UN. Composed of 15

members who are elected for a term of nine (9) years by absolute majority vote in the
General Assembly and the Security Council.
Functions:
a) Decide contentious cases
b) Renders advisory opinions

42 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Treaty
An international agreement concluded between states in WRITTEN FORM and
GOVERNED by INTERNATIONAL LAW, whether embodied in a single instruments or in two or
more instrument and whatever its particular designation.
Requisites for Validity:
1. Treaty- making capacity
2. Competence of the representatives/ organ concluding treaty
3. Parties must freely give consent
4. Object and subject matter must be lawful
5. Ratification in accordance with constitutional processes of the parties concerned

Treaty-Making Process
1. Negotiations
2. Signing of the treaty
3. Ratification
4. Entry into the force
4.1 Exchange of instruments of ratification
4.2 Registration with and publication by the UN

Treatment of Alien

General Rule:
No State is under obligation to admit aliens.
Expulsion of the Aliens from the Territory:
1. Expulsion/ Deportation. Predicated on the ground that the stay of the alien
constitute a menace to security of state, his entry is illegal, and permission to stay
has expired.
2. Reconduction. Forcible conveying of aliens back to their home state. Ex. Destitute
aliens, vagabonds, aliens without documents and alien criminals.

Extradition
The surrender of a person by one state to another where he is wanted for
prosecution or, if already convicted, for punishment.

Fundamental Principles Underlying Extradition

1. It is based on consent
2. Under the principle of specialty
3. Any person may be extradited
4. Political and religious offenders are generally not subject to extradition
5. The offenses must have been committed within the territory or against the interests of
the demanding state
1. Rule of double criminality

VI. The INTERPOL

The world’s largest international police organization with 188 member countries. It was
created in 1923, which facilitates cross-border police cooperation and support as well as assists
all organizations, authorities and services whose mission is to prevent or combat international
crime.

INTERPOL aims to facilitate international police cooperation even where diplomatic

relations do not exist between particular countries. Action is taken within the limits of existing laws
in different countries and in the spirit of the universal Declaration of Human Rights. INTERPOL’S
constitution prohibits any intervention or activities of political, military, religious or racial character.

Organizational Set-up

1. General Assembly – INTERPOL’S supreme governing body. It makes major

decisions on the policy, budget, working methods, finances and program of activities of
INTERPOL. It comprises delegates appointed by each member countries and meets annually.
2. Executive Committee – Supervises the execution of the decision of the general
assembly and the work of secretary general.
3. General Secretariat – Implements decisions and recommendations adopted by the
two governing bodies (General Assembly and Executive Committee) through Secretary General.
4. National Central Bureaus – Staffed with the countries own police officers. It is
designated single point of contact for the General Secretariat, regional offices and foreign
governments requiring assistance, which oversees investigations and information.

43 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

5. Advisers – Experts in a purely advisory capacity, who maybe appointed by the

Executive Committee and confirmed by the General Assembly.

Commission for the Control of the INTERPOL's Files (CCF) - This is the independent
body whose mandates are:
1. Ensure that the processing of personal information by the INTERPOL complies
with the organization’s regulations;
2. Advise INTERPOL on any project, operation, set of rules or other matter
involving the processing of personal information; and
3. Process request concerning the information contained in INTERPOL’S files.

Three (3) Core Functions of the INTERPOL

1. Secure Global Police Communication Services (1-24/7) – it provides police
around the world with a common platform through which they can share crucial
information about criminals and criminality.
2. Operational Data Services and Databases – it ensures that police worldwide
have access to the information and services they need to prevent and investigate
crimes. Databases includes data on criminals such a names, fingerprints, DNA
profiles, stolen property such as passports, vehicles etc.
3. Operational Police Support Services – it supports law enforcement officials in
the
field with emergency support and operational activities, especially in its priority
crime areas of fugitive, public safety and terrorism, drugs and organized crime,
trafficking in human beings and financial high- tech crimes

INTERPOL Notice System

1. Red Notice – based on the national arrest warrants, are used to seek the arrest
and extradition of suspects.
2. Blue Notice – used to seek information on the identity of persons or on their
illegal activities related to criminal matters.
3. Green Notice – are used to provide warning and criminal intelligence about
persons who have committed criminal offenses and who are likely to repeat these
crimes in other countries.
4. Yellow Notice – used to locate missing persons
5. Black Notice – used to determine the identity of deceased person.
6. Orange Notice – to warn of an event, a person, an object or a process
representing an imminent threat and danger to persons or property.
7. Purple Notice – issued to provide information on modus operandi, objects,
devices and concealment methods used by criminals.
8. INTERPOL–United Nations Security Council Special Notice – is issued for
individual and entities that are subject to UN sanctions.

Crimes of Concerns of the INTERPOL

1. Public Safety and Terrorism
2. Trafficking of Human Beings
3. Fugitive Investigative Services
4. Financial and High- Tech Services
5. Drugs and Criminal Organizations
6. Others such as: genocide, war crimes, crimes against humanity, environmental
crimes and law enforcement corruption.

VII. The ASEANAPOL

The current membership of ASEANAPOL is composed of ten (10) States to wit:: 1)

Brunei; 2) Cambodia; 3) Indonesia; 4) Laos; 5) Malaysia; 6) Myanmar; 7) Philippines; 8)
Singapore; 9)Thailand; and 10) Vietnam.

1. ASEANAPOL EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE – it comprise of Deputy Heads of

Delegation attending the annual ASEANAPOL Conference. It provides a
summary repost of the activities of the Secretariat to the Head of Delegation at
the ASEANAPOL Conference.
2. ASEANAPOL PERMANENT SECRETARIAT – Was on rotational basis with
member countries taking turn to host the ASEANAPOL Conference and
automatically assume the role of the secretariat for the current year. It is headed
by an Executive Director and he is assisted by 2 Directors, one for Police
services and one for Plans and Programs.

44 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

OBJECTIVE OF THE ESTABLISHMENT OF A PERMANENT SECRETARIAT

1. Harmonize and Standardize coordination and communication mechanism
amongst ASEAN police institutions;
2. Conduct a comprehensive and integrative study concerning the resolutions
agreed in the ASEANAPOL joint Communiqués;
3. Establish a mechanism with responsibility to monitor and follow up the
implementation of resolutions in the joint Communiqués; and;
4. Transform the resolutions adopted in the Joint Communiqués into
ASEANAPOL Plan of Action and its work program.

EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR OF THE ASEANAPOL SECRETARIAT – approved by

the ASEANAPOL Conference upon nomination on rotational basis in alphabetical order
for a term of two years. He shall be a Senior Police Officer with a rank of Colonel above
or its equivalent.
He shall present a report of the activities, including among others, issues on
financial performance, procurement of works, supplies and services and control,
management of contracts of the Secretariat to the ASEANAPOL Executive Committee.

EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR’S OBJECTIVES

1. Ensure the effective implementation of all resolutions adopted at the
ASEANAPOL Conferences;
2. Serve as a coordination and communication mechanism to allow members to
establish and to maintain all channels of interaction amongst members;
3. Foster mutual assistance and cooperation amongst members; and
4. Endeavor to increase regional cooperation efforts against transnational
crimes.

EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR’S FUNCTIONS

1. Prepare and implement work plans for effective implementation of all the
resolutions adopted in the annual joint communiqués signed at the
ASEANAPOL Conference;
2. Facilitate and coordinate cross border cooperation on intelligence and
information sharing and exchange.
3. Facilitate and coordinate joint operations and activities involving criminal
investigations, building and maintenance of ASEANAPOL database, training
capacity, building, development of scientific investigative tools, technical
support and Forensic Sciences;
4. Provide support and necessary assistance in organizing the ASEANAPOL
Conference;
5. Submit on a quarterly basis to the chiefs of ASEAN Police Forces proposals
on all planned programmed activities to be carried out;
6. Prepare an annual report on its activities and expenditure to be presented to
the ASEANAPOL Executive Committee immediately before the ASEANAPOL
Conference, and distribute to all members and to the ASEANAPOL
Conference; and
7. Act as a custodian of all documents and records of ASEANAPOL

PNP AGREEMENTS WITH ASEAN POLICE ORGANIZATIONS

1. Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) between the PNP and KNPA; September 10,
2013 in South Korea which covers cooperation in crime information exchange, capacity building,
exchange in law enforcement technology, studies on the prevention and control of illicit drug
trafficking, terrorism, arms smuggling, human trafficking, cybercrimes, money laundering,
international economic crimes and banking offenses, and forgery, among others. It also provides
establishment of Police Liaison Desks in the PNP and KNPA to facilitate police assistance to
Filipino nationals.

2. Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) between the PNP and the Indonesian National
Police (INP) to expand regional inter-agency cooperation against transnational crimes on March
8, 2011 at the Istana Merdeka in Jakarta. The agreement covers the following crimes: drug
trafficking, terrorism, arms smuggling, human trafficking, maritime piracy, cyber crimes,
commercial crimes, bank offenses, credit card fraud, fraudulent travel documents, and other
forms of commercial and financial fraud.

VIII. PARTICIPATION OF PNP PERSONNEL IN UN PEACEKEEPING MISSIONS [PNP-MC

2007-012 AS AMENDED BY PNP MC NO 2009-006]

45 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Glossary

UNPOC- United Nations Peacekeeping Operations Center

UNAMID- United Nations African Union-Hybrid Operations in Darfur [160 police officers]
UNTAC- United Nations Transitional Authority in Cambodia

General Background

United Nations Charter provides the terms of reference for the various elements of the
United Nations in fulfilling its responsibilities. Its primary purpose is to maintain international
peace and security. UN Efforts to Restore International Peace and Security are
categorized into seven (7) concepts, namely:
1. Preventive Diplomacy
2. Peacemaking
3. Peacekeeping
4. Peace-enforcement
5. Peace-building
6. Sanctions
7. Disarmament

Policy Framework for Philippine Participation

The Republic of the Philippines is committed to global peace, and as a founding

member of the United Nations, abides by its Charter and recognizes that the
maintenance of international peace and security is a primary responsibility of the United
Nations.

Scope of Philippine Involvement

1. The Philippines supports the role of the United Nations
2. Philippine participation in UN peace operations should be decided by taking into
consideration the following factors: national capabilities, the domestic peace and order situation
and ultimately national interest and national goals.
3. UN peace operations that are being, or may be, conducted in Southeast Asia and
other areas of Asia Pacific will be given highest priority in considering Philippine
Participation.
4. The safety and security of Philippine personnel assigned to UN peace operations are
of paramount importance.
5. The Philippines recognizes the importance of peace-building activities in the rebuilding
of states

Concept of Peacekeeping Operations

UN Peacekeeping Operations are guided by the following fundamental principles:
1) Consent
2) Impartiality
3) Minimum use of force
4) Credibility
5) Negotiation and Meditation

Composition
1) Diplomatic and political officers
2) Human rights component
3) Civil Administration component
4) Electoral component
5) Repatriation component
6) Civilian Police component
7) Border Monitors
8) Military Component
9) International Staff and Field Service
10) Local Recruitment

Civilian Police in Peacekeeping Operations

Rationale
1) A functioning law enforcement and criminal justice system that upholds and enforces
the rule of law without fear or favor .

46 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

2) In some post-conflict environments, the law enforcement and criminal justice systems
may be the first institutions of local civil authority to be rebuilt after the cessation of
hostilities.

Consequently, in peacekeeping operations, the Civilian Police (CIVPOL)

component is often asked to play a prominent role in the transition from conflict to lasting
peace, security, and development.

Fundamental Principles Adhere by Civilian Police In United Nations Peacekeeping

Operations:
1) Consent and Cooperation
2) Impartiality and Objectivity
3) Minimum use of Force
4) Clear and Achievable Mandate
5) Continuous and active support of the Security Council and contributing Countries.
6) Legitimacy
7) Unity of Effort and Command
8) Transparency
9) Mobility and Adaptability

PNP Standard Qualification For UN Mission

1) An UNSAS [United Nations Standby Arrangement System] eligible;
2) A Police Commissioned Officer (PCO) must have a rank of at least Police Senior
Inspector while a Police Non-Commissioned Officer (PNCO) applicant must have a rank of at
least Police Officer III;
3) Have attained at least five (5) years of active police service (excluding cadetship for
PMA, PNPA, PMMA, and equivalent Officer’s Training/Field Training Program (FTP) for Lateral
Entry Officers and Recruitment Training for Police Non-Commissioned Officers);
4) Appointment in permanent status in his/her present rank;
5) Have at least one (1)year experience in vehicle driving reckoned from the date of
issuance of his/her valid driver’s license;
6) Recommended by his/her Unit Commander (Command Group, D-Staff Directors, RDs
of PROs, NSUs Directors and District Directors);
7) Have a Performance Evaluation Rating (PER) of at least Very Satisfactory (VS) for two
(2) consecutive semestral rating period immediately preceding his/her application;
8) With no pending administrative or criminal case in any body/tribunal or court nor a
witness to any such case nor a summary hearing officer with unresolved cases;
9) Have not been repatriated from previous UN Mission for disciplinary reason/s;
10) With knowledge on basic computer operations (e.g. Word, Excel, PowerPoint, e-mail
and Internet);
11) Passed the latest Physical Fitness Test (PFT) conducted by DHRDD as well as
Medical, Dental and Neuro Psychiatric Examination; and
12) Without firearm accountability as certified by the Directorate for Logistics (DL).

PRIORITY for DEPLOYMENT

1st priority- PNP personnel without previous UN Mission deployment
2nd priority- PNP personnel with previous UN mission deployment
Personnel who obtained the highest exam rating, or those superior in rank,
length of service, educational attainment, or with fewer missions, in such order
shall have priority for deployment.

DEFAULT
1) Non-submission of documentary requirements to the Secretariat on specified
date
2) Failure to report for processing for deployment
3) Non-Attendance to the scheduled Pre-Departure Orientation Seminar (PDOS)

Re-Deployment of PNP Personnel To UN Mission

1. Announcement of UNSAT Pre-Qualifying Examination
2. Submission of Documentary Requirements (Applicant )
3. Applicants Undergo Pre-qualifying Examinations UNSAS)
4. Qualified Applicants Undergo Examinations (UNSAT)
5. UNSAT Passers Undergo PDOS [Pre-Departure Orientation Seminar]
6. Selection of Nominees by Selection Committee
7. PNP Submits Nominees to the UN
8. Interview of Nominees Conducted by Authorities of UN Peacekeeping Mission
9. UN Issues Tracking Deployment
10. Nominees Undergo Deployment Medical Examinations

47 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

11. DPL Facilitates Application of Official Passport

12. DPKO Issues Travel and Financial Authorizations
13. NAPOLCOM Issues Travel Authority/DPRM Issues Travel Order
14. DPL Facilitates Booking of PNP Personnel Selected for Deployment
15. Exit Call to TDPL

POLICE PATROL OPERATIONS

I. Basic Concepts and Definitions

A. The Origin of the Word of “Police” and “Patrol”

POLICE
 The word POLICE was derived from Greek word POLIS which means “city-state”.
Another Greek word POLITEIA which means “government of the city”. The Roman
changed the word slightly to POLITIA which means “condition of the state or
government”.
 The French changed the word to “Police” which means person who enforced the law
and it was later adopted by the English Language.

PATROL
 French word PATROUILLER - rough by, to travel on foot. Police activity where one or
more police officer/s making round in order to guard or inspect property and to protect
lives within a designated area.
 Form of police service which directly attempts to eliminate the desire or opportunity of an
individual to commit misconduct.

B. Overview of Patrol work

1. Patrol is the innovator of police department in crime prevention.
2. Patrol force serves as the nucleus of police department.
3. Police Patrol is the basic law enforcement method.
4. Patrol work is interesting when intelligent effort is made to discover and solve
problems.
5. Careful patrol is the first line of defense against crime.
6. Patrol work deals basically with people.
7. Patrol officers’ actions have a direct impact on the community’s well being.

II. The Importance and Objectives of Police Patrol

A. Patrol force as the ESSENCE of Police function

1. It is the soul or spirit of police organization.
2. The patrol function is the most visible form of police activity and directly attempts to
eliminate the opportunity to commit crime.
3. The Patrol force is the “ears and eyes” of the Police Organization.

B. The Patrol force as the BACKBONE of the Police Organization

1. It is the most important of all police functions.
2. It is the only division that cannot be eliminated.
3. They are considered as the Prime mover of the organization other units of Police
Organization participate only in a supportive capacity.
4. The actions taken by the Patrol officers are reflected to the Police Organization
5. The patrol division is often the only one to work on a twenty-four hour basis.

C. Patrol force as the OPERATIONAL HEART of Police Organization

1. Almost all police function had been vested to the patrol division.
2. Patrol has the direct contact with the society, and is responsible for its primary
objectives.
3. The Patrol force incorporates all objectives inherent in the police organization

D. Goals and Objectives of Police Patrol

General Goal: SAFEGUARDING THE COMMUNITY 
Functional Objectives:
1. Protection of life and property
2. Preservation of peace and order
3. Prevention of crime
4. Suppression of criminal activities

48 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

5. Apprehension of criminals
6. Enforcement of laws and ordinances
7. Regulation of non-criminal conduct
8. Performing necessary services and inspections.

E. Specific Police Patrol Activities:

1. Patrol and Observation
2. Called for Services
3. Inspectional Services
4. Control for public gatherings
5. Responding to emergencies
6. Attending to complaints
7. Conducting initial investigations
8. Preservation of crime scene
9. Criminal apprehension
10. Writing reports

II. Factors Affecting Patrol Operations

A. Patrol Deployment: Factors to be Considered

1. Size and shape of their AOR
2. Modes of transportation
3. Problems encountered on the beat
4. Level of trust and confidence of the people to the police
5. Location and number of crimes and arrest

B. Factors Affecting Efficient And Effective Distribution Of Patrol

Forces 
1. Chronological distribution: crime clock and/or crime map
2. Geographical distribution
3. Walking beats
4. Motorized patrol distribution

C. Police Hazards
Hazard - Any person, place, thing, situation, or condition which, if allowed to exist
may induce an accident or cause the commission of a crime.

Police Hazard - Any person, place, thing, situation, or condition possessing a

high potential for criminal attack or for creation of any other type of problem
necessitating a demand for immediate action.

Persons Places Property Situation/Condition

 Criminals  Piers  Unoccupied  Athletic Events
 Alcoholics  Railroad Station  Dwellings  Political
 Addicts  Boarding/Lodging  Warehouses Meetings
 Prostitutes Houses  Safes  Parades
 Gamblers  Gambling Joints  Automobiles  Conventions
 Pimps  Pool Halls  Buildings  Demonstrations
 Drug Peddlers  Parks  Under  Celebrations
 Feebleminded  Second Hand Construction  Disasters
 Insane Stores  Gas Stations
 Juvenile  Prostitution Dens  Banks
Delinquents
 Problem
Children
 Vagrants
 Taxi drivers

Factors that Creates Hazards

1. Deficient Visibility - resulting from inadequate illumination or

obstruction of views, may create both crime and accident hazards.

2. The insecurity of premises and other properties - which is

created by the absence of suitable locks, bars and gratings.

49 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

3. The presences of condition of things create hazards . A lake or

stream of water poorly designed roadways, defects or obstruction in
public spaces and presence of combustibles.

4. The presence of people maybe a hazard . A crowd offers

opportunities for theft, loss of persons or things, and fights and panic
that may injure persons or damage property.

5. Lack of regulation may be a hazard.

III. Organization and Staffing of the Patrol Function

A. Organization- Consists of arranging personnel and functions in a

systematic manner designed to accommodate stated goals and
objectives in the most efficient manner possible.

B. Organization Principles Applicable in Patrol Operations

1. Simplicity - done by providing simple organizational plan clearly

understood by all concerned, yet detailed enough to provide clear
lines of authority and responsibility.
2. Organizing by function - it emphasizes the grouping of similar
tasks, job assignments, performance of functions together and
placing them under a single supervision or command officer.
3. Span of Control - it is based on the assumption that there is a limit
to the number of individuals that one person can effectively
supervise.
4. Chain of Command - it holds that successive person in the chain of
command, from the first level supervisor to the chief of police, must
be given an opportunity to deal with those incidents for which he or
she is responsible.
5. Unity of Command - it is based on the belief that an individual
should be responsible to one and only one person at any given time
and in any given situation.
6. Delegation of Authority - the assignment of tasks, duties, and
responsibilities to subordinates while at the same time giving them
the power or right to control, command, make decisions, or otherwise
act in performing the delegated responsibilities.

7. Command Responsibility - dictates that immediate

commander shall be responsible for the effective supervision and
control of their personnel and unit.

C. Planning- The process of developing a method a method of procedure or an

arrangement of parts intended to facilitate the accomplishment of a defined objectives

Types of Planning in the Patrol Unit Level

1. Supplementation of orders from higher levels
2. Origination of plans at the unit level to meet unit problems and
objectives

Types of Plans at the Patrol Unit Level

1. Procedural plans. Outlined procedures that are officially adopted by all
members of the unit under specified circumstances, such as standard operating
procedures of booking of prisoner, method of testing person under the influence of
alcohol, radio station operation, clerical procedures, etc.
2. Tactical plans. Plans which concern methods of action to be taken at a
designated location and under specified circumstances, such as major incidents,
disasters, special events, road blocks, major crimes, etc.
3. Operational plans. Refer to work programs in the field such as the estimation
of work to be done, allocation of manpower and equipment, defining of work objectives
and the development of the methods of its accomplishment.
4. Extra-departmental plans. Plans which require action or assistance from
persons or agencies outside of the department, such as investigation of CICL,
coordination with other law enforcement agencies, exchange of information on wanted
persons, stolen motor vehicle and the like.
5. Management plans. Those with relate to staffing, equipping, supplying and
organizing.

50 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

IV. Patrol Force Deployment and Scheduling

A. Distribution of the Patrol Force

Purposes
1. Work load
2. Response time-distance
3. Area responsibility
4. Crime reporting
5. Geographical problems
Systems of Patrol Distribution
1. Determination of available police officers
2. Chronological distribution
3. Geographical distribution

B. Territorial Units in Patrol

1. Post - A fixed point or location to which an officer is assigned for duty, such
as designated desk or office/ an intersection or cross work for traffic duty or
spot location for general guard duty.
2. Route (line beat) - A length of street or streets designated for patrol
purposes.
3. Beat - An area assigned for foot patrol purposes.
4. Sector - An area containing two or more beats, routes or posts.
5. District - A geographical subdivision of a large city, each composed of
designated districts.
6. Area - A section or territorial division of a large city.

C. Rotating vs. Assigned Shifts

Rotating Shifts. Refers to the rotation of officers across either different
working hours or different divisions within the department.
Assigned Shifts. It involve officer assignment to the same shifts and/or
areas for extended periods of time.

D. Time and Day and Shift Hours: The Three Shift Structure or
Tricks/Watches
1. 7 AM to 3 PM (watch)
2. 3 PM to 11:30 PM (swing watch)
3. Midnight (11 PM to 7 AM) (dog watch)

Assignment of Post/Shift
1. Regular Post- assigning members to its regular or usual post usually based
on seniority.
Advantages of Regular Posts
 Patrol officer becomes thoroughly familiar with the various post conditions.
 Patrol officer takes more pride and interest in improving the conditions on his
post resulting in better public relations and cooperation from the residents.
 The patrol officer moral is enhanced, since a steady post is an indication of public
acceptance of his work.
Disadvantages of Regular posts
 The patrol officer may turn the assignment into a routine detail and may take it
too much for granted.
 Familiarity with the residents may breed contempt or favoritism in the form of
gratuities.
2. Shift/Post Rotation – It is the process of assigning members of Patrol force
from post to post.  
Advantages of Post Rotation
 The patrol officer becomes acquainted with general precinct/station problems
when shifted from post to post.
 Such assignments require more observation, alertness and vigilance on the part
of the patrol officer since he is not familiar with the new layout.
 Routine patrol or fixed habits are less likely to be adopted in the new
environment which will result in more rigid enforcement.
 Favoritism will be lessened because of transitory assignments.
 Rotation expands on the officer’s experience thereby enabling him to handle
varied emergencies. 
Disadvantages of Post Rotation
 Destroys chance of specialization in the handling of individual post problems.
 Creates a tendency of leaving the unpleasant chores to the next man.
 Difficulty to cultivate sources of information as to criminal activities.

51 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

 Creates irregular living habits in the officer, to the detriment of his health.
 Bad effect on the family because of the frequently changing of shifts/post.

V. Police Patrol Methods

1. The Foot Patrol

The method consisting of fixed post line beat and random patrol.
Foot patrol is restricted to small areas and used to deal with special problems
of prevention and repression that cannot be adequately handled by the
officers in radio cars.

Advantages of Foot Patrol

1) It provides closer observation of persons and things

2) It maintains better personal contact with citizens and develops
police community relations
3) Patrol officers can enter small alleys and side streets
4) It deters vandalism, shoplifting, snatching and loitering
5) It closely observed surrounding conditions and circumstances
that may require police attention, which if not immediately acted
upon, may escalate into serious crime
6) The patrol officer, before lunging himself into any situation has
sufficient time to asses/estimate the nature and degree of the
incident

Disadvantages

1) Low Mobility
2) Low response time
3) It requires large number of personnel

2. The Mobile Patrol

The automobile is the most extensively used and the most effective
means of transportation for police patrol. Equipped with the latest kinds of
police gear, it provides a rapid, safe and efficient means of transportation
under average operating conditions.

Advantages

1) Covers wider area

2) Provides constant availability to public calls
3) Provides an element of surprise, especially when a crime is in
progress
4) Faster response to public calls
5) Provides the officer with needed protection, during inclement
weather and enables him to carry other equipment
6) It is more economical

Disadvantages

1) It diminishes personal contact with the public and sources of

information
2) It hampers apprehension and surveillance operations

Coordinated functions between Foot and Mobile Patrol

1) In manpower distribution, foot patrol officers concentrate within the

busy, congested, commercial and financial areas, whereas, the
patrol cars shall cruise the outer perimeters. Mobile patrol serves as
a back up or pursuit. Vehicle for the beat patrol officer in case of
emergencies.
2) Combine the patrol efforts by allowing patrol officers in a motorized
sector to park the car at a strategic place and patrols on foot within
the hearing distance of the vehicles radio transmission.

3. The Bicycle Patrol

52 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

The bicycle patrol has been used in many countries as a simple and
inexpensive means of silent transportation to carry police officers throughout
their patrol districts.

Small vehicles may be used for routine patrol to replace or augment foot
or automobile under conditions when such vehicle is more practical than
conventional modes of travel. The versatility of small vehicles makes them
indispensable for covering crowded areas and places unreachable by
automobile patrol.

Advantages

1) Can cover areas not accessible by patrol cars, or are too widespread
to be patrolled by foot.
2) Has the combine advantage of mobility and stealth
3) Effectively used by plainclothes patrol officers from surveillance
4) Found to be highly effective for combating theft, burglary, vandalism
in residential areas, parks and shopping malls.
5) Expedite the delivery of police assistance
6) Energy saver
7) Inexpensive to operate

4. Motorcycle Patrol

Initially used by traffic policemen for traffic management and escort.

Recently, motorcycles, because of their high mobility especially in traffic-
congested areas were used for tandem police patrols for anti-bank robbery
missions by police special units. They are fielded in areas where banks and
pawnshops are concentrated.

Disadvantages

1) Relatively high cost to operate

2) Limited use in bad weather
3) Inability to carry additional equipment or officers
4) The danger involve in riding

5. Helicopter and Fixed-Wing Aircraft

Except for patrolling long stretches or highway of inaccessible land, the

fixed-wing aircraft has very little flexibility in congested metropolitan areas.
They are however excellent for traffic control in long stretches or highways,
for search and surveillance, and other special missions. The helicopter on
the other hand has the advantage of being able to travel at low speeds, to
hover if necessary, and to land even in inaccessible areas because of its
special take-off and landing capabilities. It is useful for rescue, medical
evacuation, general patrol, criminal apprehension, crime prevention and
repression, emergency transportation, surveillance and other activities.

6. Canine (K-9) Assisted Patrol (Dog Patrol)

First used by the Egyptians for patrolling, police dogs are especially
useful in high crime areas, dangerous search situations, dealing with street
gangs, dispersing crowd, taking fleeing suspects into custody, guarding
suspects, searching alleys, parks, schools and other large building. The most
recent is in the search and detection of drugs in packages or on suspects. K-
9 corps is essential for most medium size and large police departments.

Uses of K-9s in Police Operations

1) Great assistance is search and rescue as well as in smelling out

drugs and bombs
2) Provide protection for solo patrol
3) Great value in crowd control because properly trained dogs are
virtually fearless, loyal to their handlers and have a significant
psychological effect on would-be trouble makers

53 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

4) Extensively used in international airports to detect narcotics and

bombs because of their keen sense of smell. A dog is capable of
recognizing an odor 10 million times better than a human can.
5) Specially trained dogs are effective in finding bodies - dead or alive,
just buried or buried for years
6) Locating trap people during emergencies
7) Can be an asset to public relation efforts
8) Well-trained police dogs can be used for demonstrations in public
affairs, school or parades.

Disadvantages

1) Most police dogs work with only one handler

2) K-9, like most dogs, is territorial, and its handler and its K-9 cruiser
are part of its territory
3) Dog training is expensive; it usually takes 10 to 12 weeks
4) Police department that initiates K-9 section is vulnerable to law suits

Breeds of Working Dogs Best Suited for Police Work

1) German Shepherd - the most frequently used and high scoring dog
for police work
2) Black Labrador Retrievers
3) Giant Schnauzers
4) Rottweilers
5) Doberman Pinschers
6) Bouviers
7) Newfoundlands
8) Airedale terriers
9) Alaskan Malamutes

WOLVES - (Wireless Operational Link and Video Exploration System) -

the system of attaching a miniature camera and transmitter to a search dog,
which makes the dog man's best friend and even better friend, because the dog
can now be the eyes and ears of his handler in situations, where saving life is
paramount objective

Bloodhounds - a large powerful dog with dropping ears, sagging jaws, and
keen sense of smell; formerly used for tracking.

7. Marine/Bay/River Patrol

Marine or water patrol units, aside from being highly specialized form of
police patrol, it is likewise expensive to maintain. Its objective is to use
primarily the watercraft in anti-smuggling.

8. Horse (Mounted) Patrol

Horses maybe used for certain patrol problems in jurisdictions that

contain large park areas or similar places where automobiles either cannot
go or maybe forbidden. Mobile patrol cars cannot be expected to race across
grass fields or wooden areas but horses provided the best mobility in those
situations.

9. Plain Clothes Patrol

This type of assignment is particularly effective for "saturation coverage"

of high crime areas. It provides extra coverage without alarming the
occupants with an unusual number of police officer.

For this kind of patrol, police officer should dress in a manner that would
fit the occasion and wear whatever clothing is the mode of the day and fits
the type of activity to be covered.

54 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

10. Close Circuit Television (CCTV) Patrol

It is basically used for traffic control which originates in West
Germany. Television Cameras are mounted in a weatherproof housing. They
were equipped with Zoom lens and were remotely controlled by operator who
can adjust each camera to 270 degrees. It makes possible to pick up the
license of fleeing Automobiles.

Stages of Patrol Deployment

1. Pre-Deployment
2. Deployment
3. Post-Deployment

The Patrol Patterns

1. The Clockwise - done in the start of the eight hours tour of duty, its purpose
is for the patrol officer to survey the condition and situation of the boundaries
of his area of responsibility.

2. Zig-zag or Free-wheeling - this is done by patrolling the streets within the

perimeter of the beats, not at random but with a definite target location where
patrol officer knows that his presence is necessary. This action is based on
the study of the situation and condition of the beat.

3. Counter-Clockwise - this technique is simply the reverse of the clockwise

pattern. This is done at the last hour of the eight-hour tour of duty to ensure
that nothing unusual has happened to the area of responsibility.

4. Straightway and Criss-cross - straightway is done by patrolling the length

of the street and therefore the easiest to observe the movement of the patrol
officer; while criss-cross is more or less similar to zig-zagging.

5. Cloverleaf- a pattern similar to highway intersection designed

to route traffic without interference, by means of a system of curving
ramps from one level to another, in the form of a four (4) leaf clover.

VI. Patrol Strategies and Tactics

A. The Anatomy of Crime: Elements

1. Motive,
2. Instrumentalities
3. Opportunity

A. Types of Police Patrol

1. Proactive Patrol - the deployment of field personnel in their respective AOR
with prescribe objectives and verifiable tasks schedule for the day to
augment the calls and other on-sight activities that make up the officer's day.
2. Reactive Patrol - a patrol activity, which consist of driving around the district
waiting for something to happen.
3. Preventive Patrol/Crime Prevention - an anticipation, recognition and
appraisal of crime risk and the initiation of positive action to remove or
reduce risk.

B. Police Visibility Patrol Strategies

1. Police Visibility

Police visibility is not just the presence or actual presence of the

policeman on the beat. Police visibility involves three things: Physical
presence; patrolling scheme; and response time, which must be proper,
adequate and timely (ideal is 5 minutes).

2. High and Low Visibility Patrol

The general tendency in crime prevention strategy is High Police

Visibility to ensure citizens feelings of security for the law abiding but the

55 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

reaction of fear for the would-be violators. Low visibility patrol programs have
been designed to increase police activities of arrest of criminals or are in the
act of committing selected type of crimes.

a) High Visibility Patrol

The theory underlying the high visibility patrol concept is that

increasing the "aura of police omnipresence" in the community
can reduce certain types of crimes. This effectively accomplished by
the walking beats of the foot patrol officer in the congested down
town business areas where street crimes where predominantly
committed. Another strategy of high visibility patrol is the saturation
concept wherein selected high-risk crime of robbery in residential
areas of the city is saturated by intensive patrol of clearly marked
police vehicle equipped with two-way radios.

b) Low Visibility Patrol

Low visibility patrol is a strategy wherein the members of the

police force in plainclothes patrol areas on foot or in unmarked
automobiles where street crimes become high risk.

Under the low visibility set-up, the primary purpose of patrol is no

longer crime prevention but crime repression wherein the objectives
are the increase apprehension of criminals engage in selected street
crimes and deterrence of selected criminal activity as a result of a
greater probability of apprehension.

c) Target Oriented
It is patrol strategy which is directed towards specific persons or
places.

d) Directed Deterrent
It is a patrol strategy different from traditional patrol methods
wherein patrol officers perform specific predetermined preventive
functions on a planned systematic basis.

e) Interactive Patrol Strategy

The emphasis is on police – citizen interaction wherein
community input is sought in resolving patrol problems.

f) Aggressive Patrol Strategy

The emphasis of this is on positive, target oriented activities
which includes physical security inspection. This is effective if the
information regarding identifiable crime trends is based on crime
analysis.

g) Stop and Frisk

To further imprint in the mind of criminals the feeling of fear of

arrest is the application of the strategy of "stop and frisk" both by the
foot patrol and mobile crew. When patrol officers are observed
stopping persons on the street whose behavior is suspicious,
detaining them briefly by questioning, and frisking them for
concealed weapons, the actions of the police heightens the effect of
high visibility patrol.

The stop, frisk and street interrogation procedure is a common

patrol practice, particularly in high crime areas; persons whose
behavior is suspicious are accosted on the street, interrogated and
frisked. The method of frisking is to pat down the outer clothing of the
suspect for any concealed weapon or contraband. Frisk is not search
because the police officer does not insert his hand inside the pocket
of the suspect. Instead, it is the suspect himself who produces from
his pocket, as requested by police officer, the object or article in
question.

56 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

h) Street Interview/Interrogation

The street interview or interrogation aspect is part of the stop

and frisk method. In some police department it is also known as field
interview technique. Whatever term it is called, the fact is that the
police objective is to rip crime in the bud by aggressively
investigating crimes that may have just occurred, are occurring or
are about to occur. Through this technique, persons whose answer
or conducts arouse suspicion of criminal involvement give the police
a probable cause to arrest.

The operation of this technique, being highly visible to the public,

gives a deterrent impact to the would-be criminals.

i) Decoy/Undercover/Plainclothes Patrol

The common meaning of the word decoy is trap, bait, and

induce. Hence, decoy or undercover or plainclothes operations differ
from traditional patrol methods in that the strategy is to rely heavily
on disguise, deception, and lying in wait rather than upon high and
low visibility patrol techniques. The decoy patrol concept has
achieved a high degree of success against selected types of crimes
in cities where police department resources are available to support
the activities on a continuing basis.

The Psychology of Omnipresence

The psychology of omnipresence as an initial police strategy establishes

the aura of police presence in the community, and is best exemplified and
effectively applied in patrol crime prevention activities by uniformed foot or mobile
patrol officer in conspicuously marked, radio-equipped patrol vehicles.

Its strategic objective is the patrol officer to be seen alertly and constantly
patrolling so as to establish a highly visible police presence; hence to make his
presence psychologically be felt in spite of his physical absence, thereby
creating a feeling of security on the part of the law abiding citizen, a feeling
of fear on the part of the would be violator and a feeling of confidence that
the police are constantly available to respond to any situation at a
moment's notice.

C. The Integrated Patrol System

This is the PNP's answer to the requirement of police visibility. It is contained in

the acronym PATROL which means: Policemen for P; Assigned for A; to for T;
Reinforce for R; Order in the for O; and Locality for L. (Policemen assigned to
reinforce order in the locality)

Considered as the best way of immersing policemen in various activities of a

particular area and to demonstrate to the populace the commitment of the police to
serve and protect the community. This provides a symbiotic relationship between the
police and the community, which would eventually draw the active support and
cooperation of the populace.

a. Features

1. Pre-emptive
2. Widespread and forward deployment
3. Force mixture (complimentary and supportive)
4. Cross Checking of deployment
5. Force multiplier
6. Jibes with COPS/BPLK

57 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

b. Components

1. Fixed Components - include the different police station headquarters,

police community precincts, police visibility points and traffic posts
manning the different intersections and thoroughfares.

2. Patrol Components - include the air patrols, the line beat patrols, mobile
patrols, motorcycle patrols, bicycle patrols and detective repressive patrols.

3. Auxiliary Components - include the security guards deployed in area, the

traffic enforcers/aides, the junior police, the barangay tanods, civilian
volunteers radio groups, and non-government organizations.

INTELLIGENCE AND SECRET SERVICE

I. CONCEPT, NATURE, CLASSIFICATION AND PRINCIPLES OF INTELLIGENCE

A. Definition
In General, Intelligence is a product created through the process of planning, directing,
collecting, collating, and analyzing data, for dissemination as usable information that typically
assesses events, locations of adversaries, to allow the appropriate deployment of resources to
reach a desired outcome.
For the Military, intelligence is the product resulting from the collection, evaluation,
analysis, integration, and interpretation of all available information which concerns one or more
aspect of foreign nations or are areas of operations and which is immediately or potentially
significant to planning.
For the Police, intelligence is the end-product resulting from the collection, evaluation,
analysis, integration, collation and interpretation of all available information which concerns one
or more aspects of criminal activity significant to police planning operation.
Another authority defines police intelligence as the gathering of information regarding
the activities of criminals and other law violators for the purpose of affecting their arrests,
obtaining evidence of their activities and forestalling their plans to commit a crime.
B. Broad Categories of Intelligence
1. National Intelligence- refers to the knowledge formed from the interpretation of
the intelligence developed by all the government departments which provides the
valuable inputs or the formulation of national policy and the promotion and
enhancement of national security.
2. Departmental Intelligence- refers to the knowledge required by an agency or
department of the government in order the execute its mission and discharge its
responsibilities.
3. Military Intelligence- refers to the knowledge by the military institution essential
in the preparation and execution of military plans, policies and programs that
encompasses THREE GENERAL CATEGORIES:
a. Strategic- it deals with the activities of the foreign nations.
b. Combat or Tactical- knowledge about weakness of the enemies.
c. Counter- Intelligence- blocking of information to the enemy. It provides
security to the unit.
C. Police Intelligence. Knowledge necessary in the preparation and execution of police plans,
policies and programs. GENERAL CATEGORIES OF POLICE INTELLIGENCE:
1. Strategic- intelligence which is not of practical and immediate operational value but
rather long range.
2. Line- processed information coming from the overt and covert sources that affect
police operations and harmony with the community and other government agencies. It is a
knowledge which contributes directly to accomplishment of specific objectives of immediate
concern such as raids, arrests, etc.
3. Counter- detection, prevention, and neutralization of any activity inimical to the
harmony and best interest of the police organization. Counter Intelligence are divided into
PASSIVE and ACTIVE measures.

FUNCTIONAL CLASSIFICATION OF POLICE INTELLIGENCE:

1. Criminal Intelligence (CRIMINT)- production of intelligence essential to the
prevention of crime, and the investigation, arrest and prosecution of criminal offenders.
2. Internal Security Intelligence (INSIT)- knowledge essential to the maintenance of
peace and order.
3. Public Safety Intelligence (PUSINT)- knowledge essential to ensuring the protection
of lives and properties.

Basic Principles of Intelligence Operations

58 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

1. Intelligence is Continuous- the basic principle of intelligence operation is that

intelligence activities follow a simple cycle, which is continuous.
2. Intelligence and operations are Interdependent- operational plans depend greatly on
the intelligence on that particular activity.
3. Intelligence Must Be Useful- means that the useful logical decisions can be made if
relevant intelligence is available.
4. Intelligence must be Timely- timeless is so essential that even completeness and
accuracy may be sacrificed to a certain extent.
5. Intelligence Operation Must Be Flexible- intelligence operation are based on reason
and sound judgment.
6. Intelligence Operations Require Imagination And Foresight- the agent must be given
the leeway to use his resourcefulness to obtained more than what is normally required.
7. Intelligence Require Constant Security Measures- in the handling of classified
materials, there should be a working balance between secrecy and operational
expediency.
8. Intelligence is a command responsibility
9. Intelligence require careful and thorough planning
10. Intelligence operation are influenced by elements present in the operational
environment.

II. HISTORY AND PERSONALITIES BEHIND THE DEVELOPMENT OF INTELLIGENCE

A. Moses, Sun Tzu and “THE ART OF WAR”

The earliest recorded intelligence activity could be found on Numbers 13: 17-32 of the
Old Testament of the Holy Bible when Moses sent twelve (12) scouts of the land of Canaan
where he directed them to spy the land, the people, their location and the nature of their
cities.

In the East, around 400 to 320 B.C. 100 years after the births of Confucius and Lao
Tze, Sun Tzu wrote in his book “The Art of War,” that “Those who know themselves as well
as they know their enemies will never suffer defeat”. Foreknowledge, he added, enables
sovereigns and commanders to: “strike and conquer and achieve things beyond the reach of
ordinary men”.

B. Past Intelligence Masters

1. Hannibal- Known as one of the “Greatest Military Strategist”. He spent years of
cultivating a
network of informers among Gualish tribes in Po Valley.
2. Genghis Khan- When Genghis Khan Mongol hordes invaded Europe in the 13 Th
Century, their way was prepared by locally recruited spies posing as merchants and
traders.
3. Frederick the Great- Regarded by Military historians as the “Father of Organized
Military Espionage”. He divided his agents into for classes:
a. Common Spies- recruited among poor folk, glad to earn small sum or to
accommodate a military officer;
b. Double Spies- the low informers and unreliable renegades of value chiefly in
spreading false information to the enemy;
c. Spies of Consequence- courtiers and nobleman, staff officers and kindred
conspirators, invariably requiring a substantial bribe or bait;
d. Persons who are forced to undertake espionage against their will.
4. Alexander the Great- a “Renowned Greek Conqueror” had his share of advance
information when rumors of discontent circulated from among the ranks of his men.
He was able to identify those disloyal ones by ordering the communication letters
opened and successful in curtailing the decline of esprit de corps and morale of his
men.
5. Frey Tomas de Toquemada- a “Master Planner” who conducted espionage during
the 15th century under the Inquisition wherein purging and ecclesiastical cleansing
was undertaken to fortify and solidify the church.
6. Delilah- a biblical personality who was able to gain information by using her beauty
and charm. She was responsible for the fall of Samson a known Israelite leader
who terrorized the Philistines.
7. Sir Samuel Luke- Chief Scout of Oliver Cromwell who was able to dethrone King
Charles I in the British Civil War of 1640. Sir Samuel Luke was said to be industrious
in snooping on the enemy.
8. John Churchill- first Duke of Marlborough, told critics of his enormous expenditure on
espionage that: “No war can be conducted successfully without early and good
intelligence, and such advices cannot be had but a very great expense.”

59 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

9. Edward I- an English monarch who started utilizing state informants especially to

determine seditious writing against the crown and identify of his enemies. Rewards
are given to wards for every useful information gathered.
10. Sir Francis Wasingham of England- protector of Queen Elizabeth I who organized
the secret police and established a spy network to detect fleet movement of enemies
of the British Empire particularly the Portuguese. “ Regarded as the “First Great
Spymaster.”
11. Karl Schulmeister- renowned as “Napoleon’s Eye”. He was credited for
establishing counter intelligence conducted against spies. He was the master of
deceit who used black mail to obtain vital information pertaining to the personality of
the enemies of Napoleon during the 18th Century.
12. Sir Arthur Wellesley- Duke of Wellington, who defeated Napoleon at Waterloo in
1815. Regarded as the “Greatest Military Spymaster at all Times”. He lives n a
motto: “All the business of war is to find out what you don’t know by what you do”.
13. Wilhelm Johann Karl Eduard Steiber- known as the Prussia’s “King of
Sleuthhounds”, as minister of police he started the use of propaganda and
censorship as well as utilizing statistical intelligence accounting.
14. Alfred Redl- a homosexual Double Spy, who while working as intelligence director
of Austria and Hungary, spied for the Russians.
15. William Stephenson (Code name INTRIPID)- a film mogul in England who founded
the British Security Coordination in New York to cooperate with American spy
agencies on secret orders from Winston Churchill in coordination with Franklin D.
Roosevelt. Stephenson commented that ”Battles were won because of advance
knowledge of enemy plans, could influence those plans, and could anticipate
enemy actions by methods heretofore concealed”.
16. William “Wild Bill’’ Denovan- headed the Office of Strategic Service (OSS), the
immediate forerunner of the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA). A lawyer and
millionaire Republican, Donovan enjoyed Roosevelt’s trust, friendship and most
crucial of all- direct access to the inner sanctums of the White House.

C. Notable Intelligence Organization

1. The Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) of the United States of America. A
predecessor of the Office of Strategic Services (OSS), which was formed in 1942 and renamed
CIA in 1947. It is called “THE COMPANY”.
2. The British Secret Service [BSS (MI5/MI6)] of the United Kingdom of Great
Britain. Established in 1909 as an internal departments under the control of Secret
Service Bureau. MIS now is known as Secret Intelligence Service (SIS)
3. Komitet Gosudarstvennoy Bezopasnosti (KGB) of Russia. Literally means The
Committee for State Security established in 1917 and became known as KGB in 1954.
4. ha Mossad le-Modin ule-Tafkidim Meyuhadim (MOSSAD) of Israel. Literally means
The Institute for Intelligence and Special Tasks. It was formally established in 1951 and
called “THE INSTITUTE”

III. INTELLIGENCE AS AN ORGANIZATION

A. Organizational Set-Up
1. Information Procurement Division. Divided into three (3) Operating Sections,
namely: (1) Intelligence Proper; (2) Secret Intelligence; and (3) Intelligence Operation.
a) Intelligence Proper: Research and analysis; monitoring of foreign broadcast;
study of both local and foreign printed materials; liaison with other agencies collecting
information; and interrogation and debriefing.
b) Secret Intelligence: Acquisition of confidential matters; undercover work and
surveillance; and espionage.
c) Intelligence Operation: Sabotage; counter-intelligence operations;
dissemination of propaganda; and security of VIP’s.
2. Evaluation and Distribution Division. This division takes care of the publication of
intelligence reports, determination of reliability and accuracy of procured information and
transcript of investigation and its evaluation.
3. Administration Division. Composed of management service, training and
indoctrination section, communication and maintenance.

B. Police Intelligence Organization

In the police organization, the intelligence division is structured just like the other
line and staff elements following the principles of organization and management.
Whatever names are used, the division is divided into administrative and operation. The
ADMINISTRATIVE performs the staff functions while OPERATION performs the line
functions.

60 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Line/Operation Functions
1. Collection of information in the field
2. Handling of informants
3. Establishment of contacts
4. Recruitment of informers and informants
5. Execution of certain intelligence plans

Staff/Administrative Functions
1. Processing of the collected data
2. Guidance in the collection efforts
3. Filing
4. Dissemination of processed information

IV. THE INTELLIGENCE CYCLE

A. Definition
Intelligence Cycle. It is the process through which intelligence is obtained, produced,
and made available to users.
A cyclical steps followed from intelligence planning to the dissemination of processed
information. It is a repetitive process used to produce intelligence from information.

B. Phases of Intelligence Cycle

1. Planning the Collection Effort. Consists of determination of intelligence
requirements, intelligence priorities, indicators, specific orders or requirements/selection of
collection agencies, time and place the information is to be reported, and supervising the
e3xecution of orders and requests.
2. Collection. Systematic exploitation of sources of information by collection agencies
and the delivery of the information obtained to the proper intelligence unit or agency.

Sources of Information- persons, things, or actions from which information about the
enemy, weather or terrain is derived.

Types of Source: Open Source; Non-Open

3. Processing. Steps in the intelligence cycle in which the information is converted into
intelligence.

Steps Involved in the Processing of Information

a) Recording-reducing of information to writing or some other form of graphical
representation and
the arranging of information into groups of related items such as: (1) intelligence
journal; (2)
intelligence workbook; (3) enemy situation map; (4) Order of battle/Watch
list; (5) coordinate register; and (6) identification files.
b) Evaluation- determination of the pertinence, reliability, and accuracy of the
information.
Pertinence- area of operation and who needs it, if so, by whom and when?
Reliability- sources of information by which it was collected
Accuracy- probable truth of the information
EVALUATION RATING OF COLLECTED INFORMATION
EVALUATION OF ACCURACY OF ITEM SOURCE
SOURCE
A- Completely Reliable 1- Confirmed by other T- Direct observation by a
Source commander of a unit
B- Usually Reliable 2- Probably True U- Report by a penetration
or resident agent
C- Fairly Reliable 3- Possibly True V- Report by an AFP
trooper or PNP personnel in
encounter or operation
D- Not Usually Reliable 4- Doubtfully True W- Interrogation of a
captured enemy agent or
foreigner
E- Unreliable 5- Improbable X- Observation by a
government or civilian
employee or official
F- Reliability Cannot be 6- Truth cannot be Judged Y-Observation by a
Judged member of populace

61 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Z- Documentary

c) Interpretation/Analysis- determination of the significance of the information relative to

the information and the intelligence already known and drawing deductions about the
probable meaning of the evaluated information.

Activities Involved in the Interpretation of Information

(1) Assessment- sifting and sorting of evaluated information to isolate
insignificant elements
with respect to the mission and operation of the unit.
(2) Integration- combination of elements isolated in analyzed with other known
information to
form a logical picture on hypothesis of enemy activities or influence of
operational area characteristics on the mission of the units.
(3) Deduction- designed to answer the question, ” What does the information
mean in relation
to the area of operation and the enemy situation? What could possibly
happen because
of all these? Where is all these leading to?” The interpreter determines
the significance
of the information as to the meaning of the integrated information.

4. Dissemination and Use of Intelligence

Consideration: Timeliness; Propriety
Methods: Personal contact; Messages; Intelligence Documents such as:
intelligence reports,
summaries, imagery interpretation reports, document analysis reports,
periodic intelligence reports, tactical interrogation reports, technical
intelligence reports, ORBAT Handbook, intelligence annexes, etc.

V. THE COUNTER INTELLIGENCE

Definition and Basic Concepts
Counter Intelligence. The aspects of police intelligence to all security measures, both
offensive(active) and defensive(passive) designed to ensure the safeguarding of information,
personnel, material and installation against espionage, sabotage and subversion by foreign
nations and dissident groups or individuals that constitute threat to national security.
Espionage- is the act or practice of spying. The use of spy by a government in order to discover
the military or political secret of other nations.
Sabotage- destruction of property or obstruction of public service to undermine a government,
police, or military effort.
Subversion- is an act that seeks to overthrow a constituted government it is also an act or
instance of subverting.
Treason- disloyalty to one’s own country by giving away or selling its secret to the enemy or by
trying to overthrow it.
Sedition- is any action promoting or inciting discontent or rebellion against a government.

Objectives of Counter Intelligence

1. Prevent enemy form espionage, sabotage, or subversion.
2. Security of offices or services.
3. Dent the enemy of any knowledge.
4. Aid the activity to achieve surprises.
5. Detect possible disaffection, treason or sedition within own forces.

Measures for Effective Counter Intelligence

1. Passive (Defensive)- CI measures that seek to conceal information from the enemy
e.g. secrecy discipline, communication security, concealment, camouflage
2. Active (Offensive)- CI measures that seek to actively block enemy attempt to gain
information or block enemy effort to engage in espionage, sabotage or subversion. This
includes detection, prevention and neutralization.

Categories of CI Operations
1. Police Security- measures taken by an officer to protect itself against espionage,
sabotage, subversion, surprise or enemy observation. The measures include: Security
discipline; Special safeguarding of classified information or equipment; Security of troop
movement; Special handling of evaders and escapees; Counter subversion within the police
service; Tactical measures in combat areas.

62 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

2. Civil Security- active and passive counterintelligence affecting the non military or foreign
nationals permanently or temporarily residing in an area under military or police jurisdiction.

3. Special Operation- use of active CI techniques while conducting clandestine or covert

operation against hostile and enemy intelligence organization or agency it covers: Counter
terrorism; Counter sabotage; Counter espionage; Counter subversion.

4. Port Frontier and Travel Security- military and civil security measures for CI control at
points of entry and departure international boundaries, includes security control of seaport
and frontier.

5. Censorship- control and examination of communication to prevent transmission of

information that may fail into the hands of the enemy and to collect and disseminate
information or intelligence value.
Security Operations in Relation to Counter-Intelligence

A. Physical Security. A system of barrier placed between the potential intruder and the
material being protected, such as human, animal, structural and energy barriers.

B. Communication Security. The protection resulting from the application of measures

designed to deny unauthorized persons information of value which might be derived from a study
of communications materials and information or to mislead unauthorized persons in their
interpretations of the results of such a study. It includes: physical, cryptographic and
transmission security.

Fundamentals of Cryptography: An Encoding and Decoding

Cryptography- The art and science of codes and ciphers. This is done through the use
of “Telephone Scrambler” or technically speaking, a “Speech Inverter” whereby essential
speech frequencies are divided to produce a scrambled speech when intercepted. It has so many
combinations that even intercepted; there will be a problem which setting is used.
Cryptographer- A person who is highly skilled in converting messages from clear to
unintelligible forms by the use of codes and ciphers. Also known as Coder, Encrypter, or Code
Clerk.
Crypto Analyst- Those who break intercepted codes.
Coding- The changing of message from plain clear text to unintelligible form. Otherwise
known as “Encrypting.”
Decoding- Transforming of coded message into plain text. Otherwise known as
“Decrypting”.

Secret Codes Commonly Used by Intelligence Officer

1. One-Time Pads (OTP). A One-Time Pads or OTP as it is generally known is used for
secret communications by just all of the world’s major intelligence agencies.
2. Invisible Writing. Writing invisible messages is also a good way of passing information
between people; a message can be written on a blank note and passed quite naturally
to another person.
3. Code Word. The handler can make a list of code words that can be passed on to the
agents.
4. Morse Code. Is just a simple substitution code based on dashes and dots.

C. Document Security. Document is any recorded information, regardless of its

physical form or characteristics and includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Written matter, whether handwritten, printed or typed;
2. All printed, drawn or engraved matters;
3. All sound and voice recordings;
4. All printed photographs and exposed or printed films, still or moving; and
5. All productions of the foregoing for whatever purposes.

Classified Matters-Information or material in any form or of any nature, the safeguarding

of which is necessary in the interest of national security. The term “classified police
information” or “classified military information” includes all information concerning documents,
cryptographic devices, developments, projects, and materials falling in the category of “top
secret”, “secret”, “confidential”, or “restricted”.

Four (4) Categories of classified Matter (PNPR 200-0121)

1. Top Secret- information and material whose unauthorized disclosure would cause
exceptionally grave damage to the Country.

63 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

2. Secret- information and material whose unauthorized disclosure would endanger

national security, cause serious injury to the interest and prestige of a nation or of any
government activity or would be of great advantage to a foreign nation.
3. Confidential- information and material whose unauthorized disclosure would be
prejudicial to the interest or prestige of the nation or government activity or would cause
administrative embarrassment or unwanted injury to an individual or would be an advantage to a
foreign nation.
4. Restricted- information and material that require special protection other than that
determined to be top secret, secret or confidential.

D. Personnel Security. Includes security measures designed to prevent unauthorized or

unwittable individual of doubtful loyalty to the Philippine government from:
1. Gaining access to classified matters or security facilities, armaments, restricted area
warehouse supply rooms, powerhouses etc.
2. To prevent the appointment, employment or retention of an employee of such
individual of questionable loyalty.
3. To protect own personnel from hostile activities of assassinations, sabotage,
subversion, disaffection from the opposition

Personnel Security Investigation- an inquiry into the background of an

individual particularly with respect to his character, loyalty, integrity and discretion.
Four (4) Types of Personnel Security Investigation
1. LAC
2. NAC
3. PBI
4. CBI

E. Operational Security. Protection and concealment of the methods of operations,

sources of information and personnel.
Methods: Compartmentation; Cover; Communication; Cut-Out Device
Elements: Elements of surprise: Elements of conspiracy: Proper operational planning

VI. METHODS AND TECHNIQUES OF COLLECTING INFORMATION

1. Elicitation. An indirect form of interrogation which is characterized by the obtaining of

information through subterfuge/ trickery. Its ultimate object is to get the subject talking
about topics of interest to him.
2. Casing- Discreet inspection or observation of a place (1) to determine its suitability and
vulnerability for a particular operational use, (2) to gather information necessary to
develop a plan for its operational use and (3) to verify or validate an information.
Types of Casing:
a. External- the close observation and clear description of an area, building or
installation, particularly its location, approaches and exits, types of physical
barriers used, its immediate vicinity, etc.
b. Internal- the close observation and clear description of the layout of a building,
an office or a room, etc.

3. Surveillance- The observation of a person, place, or things by human or technical

means to acquire information.
Surveillant/ Watcher- the person conducting the surveillance.
Subject/ Target- the person, place or thing under surveillance.

Kinds of Surveillance:
a. Stationary- observation point, fixed, static, premises.
b. Informer- use of street vendors, hawkers, shoe-shine boys, security guards, etc.
c. Mobile- moving.
d. Technical- accomplished by means of video or audio equipment (also known as
electronics surveillance), photography, mail intercept, e.g., telephone taps, listening
devices (bugs), beepers attached to target’s vehicle, etc.
Forms of Surveillance:
a. Discreet- every effort is made to insure that subject remains unaware of the
surveillance.
b. Normal- distance between surveillant is about half a block part.
c. Very Discreet- distance is just enough to maintain visual contact with subject.

64 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

d. Strip- several teams alternating take over the surveillance after some distance to lull
target into a false sense of security.
e. Loose- intermittent observation of the subject, may be applied frequently or
infrequently with varying period of observation on each occasion, often employed to
spot check activities of known subversive personalities.
f. Close- the objective is to maintain constant observation regardless of whether or not
targets become aware of the surveillance, e.g. VIP Security.

4. Observation and Description (ODEX). The complete awareness by an individual of his

surroundings, achieved through maximum employment of the senses; and techniques of
factually reporting one’s own observations or the sensory experience recounted by
others. ODEX involves: observation techniques; systematic approach; selecting and
identifying significant details; measuring; technical aids to observation and precautions.
5. Tactical Interrogation. The art of questioning and examining a source in order to obtain
the maximum amount of usable information in the shortest possible time. The goal of any
interrogator is to obtain useful information in lawful manner in a minimum amount of time
and meeting the intelligence requirements of any echelons of the command. Interview- is
a form of intelligence interrogation wherein the source is aware that is being interrogated
but he may or may not be aware of the true objective of the interview.

VII. COVER AND UNDERCOVER OPERATION

Undercover Operation. An intelligence/ investigation technique in which the investigator

conceals his true identity and adopts an assumed role to accomplish an intelligence/
investigation mission.
Types of Undercover Assignment:
1. Dwelling Assignment-to reside in or near the dwelling of target to maintain constant
contact with the home life of the subject.
2. Work Assignment- getting employed where the investigator can observe the
activities of the subject at his place of work.
3. Social Assignment- frequent places of entertainment and amusement habitually
being visited by the target.
4. Personal Contact Assignment- the investigator is required to develop the friendship
and trust of the target.
5. Multiple Assignment – the investigator is tasked to cover two or more of the above
specific assignments simultaneously; it can produce extensive information with
minimum expenses but more prone to compromise.

VIII. INFORMANTS AND INFORMATION NET

Informant- an individual who openly r secretly obtain or assist in obtaining information

for intelligence and CI purposes in exchange for some recompense, monetary or otherwise.
Classification of Informants
1. Incidental informants. Individuals who furnish information with no intention of repeating
his services of furnishing information on a continuing basis, such as:
a. Interviewees
b. Walk-in or Volunteers
c. Unwitting Informants

2. Casual Informants- individuals who by social or professional position possesses or has

access to information of continuing interest, and who willingly provides information to the
CI unit/ group, either in response to a specific request or his own initiative.
3. Automatic informants- those who by virtue of their positions are expected or obligated
to furnish information openly to CI unit/ groups in normal course of their duties.
4. Recruited Informants- individuals that are selected, trained and utilized as continuous
and covert sources of information concerning specific CI targets.
Recruitment of Informants:
1. Recruitment Stage- begins when a individual with potential for coverage of specific CI
operation is cultivated and finally approach for recruitment.

Steps in Recruitment
a) Spotting- collection of specific leads to individuals who may be considered as
potential informants.
b) Investigation- conducted to determine potential reliability, probable motivation and
suitability.
c) Cultivation- based on the initial result f investigation and if the potential is deemed
worthy of

65 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

further development, contact is made with the individual for purposes of cultivation
and further
assessment in preparation for a recruitment approach.
d) Approach- the urgency of the mission, the result of the investigation and the
progress of the
cultivation process are considered jointly in establishing the best method and most
appropriate
time to actually make a recruitment proposal to a potential informant.

2. Training Stage- Commences immediately upon his affirmative response to a recruitment

approach and continue as a separate phase until he becomes productive in a specific operation.
Normal Training of a Prospective Informant:
a) Security- begins immediately upon recruitment and continue throughout informant’s
affiliation
with the CI unit.
b) Training in Operational Techniques- this includes practical application in the form
of test missions whenever possible.
c) Testing- the new informant will be placed under close security test, his security,
reliability, operational capabilities and his adherence to instructions.

3. Utilization Stage- The period of productive utilization will usually overlap with training
of new informant and normally continue until his connection with the group is completely
terminated.

4. Termination Stage- this includes the execution of plans which were initiated before
recruitment for disposal of an informant who is either no longer of value or otherwise cannot
continue in an informant status.
Termination procedures:
a) Final Debriefing
b) Severance Statements
c) Fulfillment of Prior Commitments
d) Post-Termination Investigation

XI. INTRODUCTION TO NATIONAL SECURITY

Definitions
National Security. In developing countries, it refers not simply to the military dimension,
but to the whole range of dimensions of a State’s existence, which are already taken care of in
the more developed States
Traditionally, the protection of nation’s people and territory from physical assault, equated
with national defense, and threats emanate from the outside territorial boundaries.
In its holistic concept, a condition or state of being where the Filipino people’s values,
way of life, institutions, welfare and well-being, sovereignty and strategic relations are protected
and enhanced.

Human Security. Refers to having the following two (2) aspects: safety from such
chronic threats as hunger, disease and repression; and protection from sudden and hurtful
disruptions in the patterns of daily life.

Main Categories of Human Security

1. Economic Security
2. Health Security
3. Environmental Security
4. Personal Security
5. Community Security
6. Political Security

National Security Objectives

1. Moral Consensus. There is agreement among the elites of the nation on the wisdom
and righteousness of the national vision, and they are inspired by their patriotism and national
pride to participate vigorously in the pursuit of the country’s goals and objectives.
2. Cultural cohesiveness. The people share the values and beliefs handed down by
their forebears, core values strongly associated with the national community and identity despite
religious, ethnic and linguistic differences.
3. Economic Strength. The economy is strong, capable of supporting national endeavor
and derives its strength from the solidarity of people who have an organic stake in it through
participation and ownership.

66 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

4. Socio-Political Stability. There is peace and harmony among the divergent groups of
people in the country, and mutual cooperation and support exists between the government and
the people as a whole. The rule of law is supreme and respected by all sectors of society, as well
as by visiting or resident foreigners.
5. Ecological Balance. The environment is able to support sustainable development
strategies for the benefit of the nation and the people who depend on it for existence.
6. Territorial Integrity. The territory of the country is intact and under the effective
control of the Government.
7. International Harmony. The country and people enjoy cordial relations with their
neighbors, and are free from any control, interference or threat of aggression from any of them.
Filipinos are respected anywhere in the world. Filipino products and services are respected and
sought after in view of their world class quality.

XII. INTERNAL SECURITY INTELLIGENCE (INSET)

Definitions
Internal Security- The state of law and order prevailing within a nation.
Internal Defense- The full range of measures taken by the government to protect its society from
subversion, lawlessness and insurgency.
Insurgency- A condition resulting from a revolt on insurrection against a constituted government
which falls short of civil war.
Subversion- An action designed to undermine the military, economic, psychological, moral or
political strength of a regime.
Subversive Insurgency- Insurgency inaction against the various aspects of the government
authority to result in its eventual downfall. Those action or methods can be in the form of
propaganda to dissident warfare, on supported by insidious elements, indigenous or external.
Counterinsurgency- Military, paramilitary, political, economic psychological, and government to
defeat subversive insurgency.

Subversive Activities which Police Intelligence Officer Have to be Alerted On

1. Agitation and propaganda
2. Infiltration of organization
3. Organization of front group
4. Calling for “United Fronts”
5. Creation of paper organization
6. Calling for mob actions, such as demonstrations, if downs, slow-downs, civil
disobedience, and riots.
7. Use of terrorism for the purpose of isolating the people from and to make them lose
confidence in the government. This can be in the form of threats, damage to property, beatings
or associations.

Factors for Insurgency to Thrive in a Country

1. Cause, which may be social, political and economic conditions.
2. Leadership of the insurgent
3. Weakness of the government which means the inability of the armed forces, the police,
and the administrative machinery of the government to function efficiently and effectively, lesson
capacity to control the population, thereby increasing the vulnerability to subversive erosion.
4. Outside assistance.

Indicators that the Police Intelligence Officer Have to Watch Before the Outbreak of Open
Subversive Hostilities
1. Evidence of the underground
2. Marked increase in agitation and propaganda .
3. Threats, coercion on other forms of terroristic acts.
4. Organized “Demos”, or protests and any act of government inimical to their cause.
5. Meeting protesting all government measures designed to strengthen internal security.
6. A scurrility campaign against government officials.
7. Increase in civil disobedience, resistance to the police, and efforts to increase
dissension, in order to make the government seem more in effectual.

Responsibilities of the Police in the Internal Security

1. Preservation of peace. Including control of riots, and civil disturbances.

67 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

2. Protection of the population from intimidations terror and other forms of insurgency
3. Prevention of crimes and subversion
4. Enforcement of laws
5. Apprehension of offenders
6. Extension of public safety assistance.

Intelligence Requirements on Insurgent Activities

1. Identity and location of the organization and its members (Most important)
2. Recruitment methods and the identity of the recruitment
3. Financing system and identification of the collectors.
4. Logistics support and the contributors whether coerced or voluntary.
5. System of security used to hide their identification places of meeting.
6. Channel of communication

XIII. ORDER OF BATTLE INTELLIGENCE

Order of Battle (ORBAT). Identification of strength, command structure and disposition

of the personnel, units and equipment of any threat force. In general ORBAT intelligence
specialists are responsible for all information concerning threat force.

ORBAT Elements/Factors: Composition; Disposition; Strength; Tactics; Training; Logistics;

Combat Effectiveness; Personalities; Electronic Technical Data; Miscellaneous Data

XIV. CRIMINAL INTELLIGENCE (CRIMINT)

Definitions
Criminal Intelligence. Knowledge about persons or organizations engaged or
contemplating engagement in illegal activities. It may relate to tactical, strategic and
subversive matters.

Organized Syndicated Crime Group. A profit motivated and highly capable group of
persons or an enterprise organized to undertake widespread, regular or long term, large
scale, high profile and diversified criminal activities that has high impact to the economy
and national security.

List for Organized/Syndicated Crime Group

1. The Target List: master reference list outlining pertinent data on organized crime
groups.
2. The Wanted/Priority List: List consisting of persons who can be directly subject for
arrest.
3. The Watch List: List consists of persons suspected to have committed organized or
heinous crimes based from unverified reports and are subject for further monitoring, investigation
and case build-up.

INDUSTRIAL SECURITY MANAGEMENT

I. Nature, Concepts and Major Divisions of Security
A. Security – the state or quality of being secured, freedom from fear or danger; certainty.
To secure is to make safe or be protected.
 Physical measures designed to safeguard personnel, prevent unauthorized access to
material, equipment, facilities and documents, and to protect against sabotage, damage
and theft.

B. Industrial Security – physical security applied to business groups engaged in industries

like manufacturing, assembling, research and development,
processing, warehousing, and even agriculture.

C. Scope of Industrial Security Measures

1. Protective barriers
2. Security lighting
3. Personnel movement control
4. Locks and key management
5. Guard forces
6. Communication and electronic hardware
7. Fire prevention and control programs
8. Emergency plans
9. Industrial safety; and

68 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

10. Security education programs.

D. Three Major Divisions of Security

1. Physical Security- means of security, which provides for a system of
physical barriers placed between the risk and the asset to be protected.
2. Personnel Security- means of security, which ensures that the members
whom the team accepts are capable, reliable, trustworthy, loyal to the team and
healthy.
3. Information Security- means of security that prevents the destruction,
loss, distortion or disclosure of classified, critical and sensitive
proprietary information to unauthorized individuals.

Other Aspects of Security

1. Operations Security- means of security which requires and ensures the
compliance, use and enforcement of all organizational policies, systems, procedures,
rules and regulations.
2. Environment Security- means of security where all the elements that
constitute the environment of the organization are addressed in a manner which will
not disrupt the organization in the conduct of its business or in pursuit of its social
responsibility.
3. Reputation Security- means of security, which ensures that the
organization maintain a positive reputation to those that surrounds it.

II. Security Hazards

A. Security Hazards- Acts or conditions which result in a situation conducive to a breach of the
protection system and the subsequent loss or compromise secrets, or damage to personnel,
property or facilities.

B. Kinds of Security Hazards

1. Man-Made Hazards – an act or conditions affecting the safe operation of the facility,
caused by human action, accidental, or intentional. It includes sabotage, espionage,
pilferage, and theft, disloyalty, disaffection, and subversive activity.

2. Natural Hazards – those caused by natural phenomena which cause damage, disturbance
and problems of the normal functioning of human activities, including security. It includes
flood, lighting storms, volcanic eruptions, high velocity winds, tidal waves, etc.

C. Types of Security Measures for an Effective Defense Against Threats and Hazards

1. Active-Measures – those that prevent, frustrate or blocked a person/s from

executing plans to commit crime. It involves the installation of physical
barriers, security lighting, use of vaults, locks and others.

2. Passive-Measures – those that deters man from committing such act because of fear of
being caught, charge in court or dismissed. These include implementation of security
education, personnel security investigation and relentless implementation of rules in case of
violation, etc.

D. Factors that Affect the Extent and Degree of Risk to Security

1. Relative Criticality of Operations – the importance of the firm with reference to the
national economy and security.
2. Relative Vulnerability – the susceptibility of the plant or establishment to damage, loss or
disruption of operation due to various hazards.

E. The Casual and Systematic Pilferer

1. Casual Pilferer – one who steals due to his inability to resist the unexpected opportunity
and has little fear by detection
2. Systematic Pilferer – one who steals with perceived plans and takes away any or all
types of items or supplies for economic gain.

III. Risk Assessment, Analysis and Management

A. Definitions
Risk assessment- an overall process or method by which the Security identifies hazards
and risk factors that have the potential to cause harm (hazard identification); analysis and
evaluation of the risk associated with the hazard (risk analysis, and risk evaluation); and

69 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

determination of appropriate ways to eliminate the hazard, or control the risk when the hazard
cannot be eliminated (risk control).
Hazard identification – the process of finding, listing, and characterizing hazards.
Risk evaluation –process of comparing an estimated risk against given risk criteria to
determine the significance of the risk.
Risk control – actions implementing risk evaluation decisions. It involves monitoring, re-
evaluation, and compliance with decisions.

B. Goals of Risk Assessment

1. Evaluate hazards; and
2. Remove the hazard or minimize the level of its risk by adding control measures

C. How does a security risk assessment work?

Factors such as size, growth rate, resources, and asset portfolio affect the depth of
risk assessment models. Organizations can carry out generalized assessments when
experiencing budget or time constraints. However, generalized assessments don’t
necessarily provide the detailed mappings between assets, associated threats, identified
risks, impact, and mitigating controls.
If generalized assessment results don’t provide enough of a correlation between
these areas, a more in-depth assessment is necessary.

D. Four (4) Steps of a Successful Security Risk Assessment Model

1. Identification. Determine all critical assets of the technology infrastructure. Next,
diagnose sensitive data that is created, stored, or transmitted by these assets. Create
a risk profile for each.
2. Assessment. Administer an approach to assess the identified security risks for
critical assets. After careful evaluation and assessment, determine how to effectively
and efficiently allocate time and resources towards risk mitigation. The assessment
approach or methodology must analyze the correlation between assets, threats,
vulnerabilities, and mitigating controls.
3. Mitigation. Define a mitigation approach and enforce security controls for each risk.
4. Prevention. Implement tools and processes to minimize threats and vulnerabilities
from occurring in your firm’s resources.
E. Problems that Security Risk Assessment Solve
1. Identify assets (e.g., network, servers, applications, data centers, tools, etc.) within
the organization.
2. Create risk profiles for each asset.
3. Understand what data is stored, transmitted, and generated by these assets.
4. Assess asset criticality regarding business operations. This includes the overall
impact to revenue, reputation, and the likelihood of a firm’s exploitation.
5. Measure the risk ranking for assets and prioritize them for assessment.
6. Apply mitigating controls for each asset based on assessment results.
F. Risk Analysis
Risk analysis –process of comprehending the nature of hazards and determining the
level of risk to provide a basis for risk evaluation and decisions about risk control. Information
of which can include current and historical data, theoretical analysis, informed opinions, and
the concerns of stakeholders. Risk analysis includes risk estimation.
Use of Risk Analysis
Risk analysis is useful in many situations:
1. When you're planning projects, to help you to anticipate and neutralize possible
problems.
2. When you're deciding whether or not to move forward with a project.
3. When you're improving safety and managing potential risks in the workplace.
4. When you're preparing for events such as equipment or technology failure, theft, staff
sickness, or natural disasters.
5. When you're planning for changes in your environment, such as new competitors
coming into the market, or changes to government policy.
Steps in Risk Analysis
1. Identify Threats. The first step in Risk Analysis is to identify the existing and
possible threats that you might face. These can come from many different sources.
For instance, they could be:
1.1 Human – Illness, death, injury, or other loss of a key individual.
1.2 Operational – Disruption to supplies and operations, loss of access to
essential assets, or failures in distribution.
1.3 Reputational – Loss of customer or employee confidence, or damage to
market reputation.

70 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

1.4 Procedural – Failures of accountability, internal systems, or controls, or

from fraud.
1.5 Project – Going over budget, taking too long on key tasks, or
experiencing issues with product or service quality.
1.6 Financial – Business failure, stock market fluctuations, interest rate
changes, or non-availability of funding.
1.7 Technical – Advances in technology, or from technical failure.
1.8 Natural – Weather, natural disasters, or disease.
1.9 Political – Changes in tax, public opinion, government policy, or foreign
influence.
1.10 Structural – Dangerous chemicals, poor lighting, falling boxes, or any
situation where staff, products, or technology can be harmed.

Approaches in Carrying Out a Risk Analysis:

a) Run through a list of threats to see if any of these threats are relevant.
b) Think about the systems, processes, or structures that you use, and analyze
risks to any part of these. What vulnerabilities can you spot within them?
c) Ask others who might have different perspectives. If you're leading a team,
ask for input from your people, and consult others in your organization, or
those who have run similar projects.
2. Estimate Risk. Once you've identified the threats you're facing, you need to
calculate both the likelihood of these threats being realized, and their possible
impact.
One way of doing this is to make your best estimate of the probability of the
event occurring, and then to multiply this by the amount it will cost you to set things
right if it happens. This gives you a value for the risk:
Risk Value = Probability of Event x Cost of Event

As a simple example, imagine that you've identified a risk that your rent may
increase substantially.
You think that there's an 80 percent chance of this happening within the next
year, because your landlord has recently increased rents for other businesses. If this
happens, it will cost your business an extra $500,000 over the next year.
So the risk value of the rent increase is:
0.80 (Probability of Event) x P500,000 (Cost of Event) = P400,000 (Risk Value)

You can also use a Risk Impact/Probability Chart  to assess risk. This will help
you to identify which risks you need to focus on.

G. Risk Management
Process of anticipating, recognizing, and analyzing risks; and the taking steps to
reduce or prevent such risks and evaluating the results.
1. Avoid the Risk (Terminate the risk)
In some cases, you may want to avoid the risk altogether. This could mean
not getting involved in a business venture, passing on a project, or skipping a
high-risk activity. This is a good option when taking the risk involves no
advantage to your organization, or when the cost of addressing the effects is not
worthwhile.
Remember that when you avoid a potential risk entirely, you might miss out
on an opportunity.
2. Share the Risk (Transfer the risk)
You could also opt to share the risk – and the potential gain – with other
people, teams, organizations, or third parties.
For instance, you share risk when you insure your office building and your
inventory with a third-party insurance company, or when you partner with another
organization in a joint product development initiative.
3. Accept the Risk (Tolerate the risk)
Your last option is to accept the risk. This option is usually best when there's
nothing you can do to prevent or mitigate a risk, when the potential loss is less
than the cost of insuring against the risk, or when the potential gain is worth
accepting the risk.
For example, you might accept the risk of a project launching late if the
potential sales will still cover your costs.
Before you decide to accept a risk, conduct an Impact Analysis  to see the
full consequences of the risk. You may not be able to do anything about the risk
itself, but you can likely come up with a contingency plan to cope with its
consequences.

71 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

However, it's important to bear in mind that everyone's definition of

"acceptable risk" is different, so be sure to communicate with others before you
make a decision, and use tools like the Prospect Theory  to predict people's
different reactions to risk.
4. Control the Risk (Treat the risk)
If you choose to accept the risk, there are a number of ways in which you can
reduce its impact.

Methods of Risk Control

a) Business Experiments  are an effective way to reduce risk. They

involve rolling out the high-risk activity but on a small scale, and in a
controlled way. You can use experiments to observe where problems
occur, and to find ways to
introduce preventative and detective actions before you introduce
the activity on a larger scale.
b) Preventative action involves aiming to prevent a high-risk situation
from happening. It includes health and safety training, firewall
protection on corporate servers, and cross-training your team.
c) Detective action involves identifying the points in a process where
something could go wrong, and then putting steps in place to fix the
problems promptly if they occur. Detective actions include double-
checking finance reports, conducting safety testing before a product
is released, or installing sensors to detect product defects.
d) Plan-Do-Check-Act  is a similar method of controlling the impact of a
risky situation. Like a business experiment, it involves testing
possible ways to reduce a risk. The tool's four phases guide you
through an analysis of the situation, creating and testing a solution,
checking how well this worked, and implementing the solution.

H. Risk, Threat, Vulnerability and Consequence

Risk is the potential for loss, damage or destruction of assets or data caused by a
threat. 
Threat is a person or process that magnifies the likelihood of a negative event
due to the exploitation of a vulnerability that may have negative consequences to
critical assets.
Vulnerability is a weakness in your infrastructure, networks or applications that
potentially exposes you to threats.  
Consequence  the degree of negative impact an incident would have if it were to
occur. 

What is the Best Way to Determine if Security is Adequate? A Security Risk

Assessment.

More and more organizational leaders and Boards of Directors are asking the
question, “is my security adequate?”  To that question, one can only respond with
another question, which is “adequate for what?”  In our personal lives, if we want to know
what is wrong with us, we will visit a doctor to be checked out or, as a minimum, have
periodic evaluations of our general health.  What would your reaction be, if without any
testing or diagnosis whatsoever, your doctor suddenly informed you that you needed a
serious operation?  You would question why a conclusion is being drawn without an
investigation and rightfully so!  Similar philosophy should be applied to your security
program.  Significant changes to your security should not be implemented without the
proper diagnosis called the risk assessment.  As you read this article, can you produce
the proof or articulate to your leadership or Board of Directors that you have identified
and addressed the most likely security risks associated with your critical assets?  This
article will provide key definitions and demonstrate that the terms, “threat,” “vulnerability”
and “risk” are not interchangeable.  I will discuss various methodologies to help you get
the desired outcome of a security analysis.  While there are many ways to assess
security, none are more effective than the comprehensive risk assessment that considers
all three elements of risk as shown below.
Risk = Threat + Consequence + Vulnerability

Risk in this formula can be broken down to consider the likelihood of threat
occurrence, the effectiveness of your existing security program, and the consequences of
an unwanted criminal or terrorist event occurring.  Here are some basic definitions to

72 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

clarify the parts of the formula and the variations in outcome which occur if any portion of
the three-part analysis is omitted.
Threat – a criminal or terrorist event which can have negative consequences on a
critical asset. 

Categories of Critical Assets

a) People property or monetary
b) Continuity of operations
c) Intellectual property
d) Reputation

Vulnerability – The next part of the risk assessment addresses vulnerability or

“effectiveness of security”.  Vulnerability is synonymous with susceptibility or weakness in
an organization’s ability to prevent an attack against a critical asset.

Consequence – Consequence can be viewed as the degree of negative impact

an incident would have if it were to occur.  The table below shows an illustration of how
one might develop a consequence model for an organizational security risk assessment. 
While the people safety consequence dimension is easy to define, the other
consequence dimensions are very personal to each organization and will have to be
determined at the onset of a security risk assessment.

IV. Basic Physical Security and Control

A. Physical Security - A barrier or system placed between the potential intruder
and the matter to be protected.
1. Perimeter Barrier (1st line of defense) – a medium or structure which defines the
physical limits of an installations or area to restrict or impede access thereto. It is any physical
barrier used to supplement the protection of an inside or outside perimeter:

Purpose of Perimeter Barrier

1) Outline the perimeter of the area to be secured;
2) Create a physical and psychological deterrent to unauthorized entry:
3) Delay intrusion, thus facilitating apprehension of intruders;
4) Assist in a more efficient and economical employment of guards
5) Facilities and impose the control of pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

Two General Types of Physical Barriers

1) Natural Barrier – include mountains, cliffs, cannons, rivers, seas, marshes,
dessert or terrain difficult to traverse.
2) Man-Made Barriers – structural constructions like fences, walls, floors, roofs,
grills, bars, road blocks, or other physical means to deter or impede penetration

Types of Perimeter Barrier

1) Wire Fences – a type of perimeter barriers made of chain link designed with mesh
openings not longer than two inches squares, and made of No. 9 gauge wire or heavier,
minimum height, which is 7 ft.
2) Building Wall – Masonry wall should have the same as the chain linked and
surrounded by the barbed wire top guard; if the height is less than the prescribe
additional chain linked as “toppings” is placed to attain the minimum height requirement.
3) Bodies of Water – a necessary additional security measures.

Perimeter Barrier Openings: Gates and doors; Sidewalk elevator; and

Utilities opening

Additional Protective Measures

1) Top Guard – an addition overhang or barbed wire place on vertical perimeter
fences facing upward and outward with a 45-degree angle with three to four strands of
barbed wires space six inches apart. This will increase the protective height and prevent
easy access.
2) Entry Stations – provided at main perimeter entrances to secure areas
located out of doors, and manned by guards on a full-time basis.
3) Towers – a house-like structures above the perimeter barriers. It gives the
psychological effects to violators.
4) Protection in Depth – in large open areas or ground where fencing or walling
is impractical and expensive, warning signs should be conspicuously placed. The depth

73 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

is protection, reduction of access roads and sufficient notice to warn intruders should be
done. Use of animal guards and intrusion devices can also be done.
5) Clear Zones – an unobstructed area maintain on both sides of the perimeter
barrier. A clear zone of 20 feet or more is desirable between the barrier and extension
structures and natural covers which may provide concealment or assistance to a person
seeking unauthorized entry.
6) Signs and Notices – control signs should be erected where necessary in the
management of unauthorized ingress and preclude accidental entry. It includes I.D.,
prohibitions and exclusive area signs.

2. Building Exteriors (2nd Line of Defense): Walls, Doors, Windows- Windows below 18 feet
must be grilled, Roof Openings, Fire Escapes- Maximum of 100 feet

3. Building Interior and Interior Controls (3rd Line of defense): ID System, Entry/Exit of
employees, visitor, suppliers, customers and their vehicles.

Visitor, Property Movement, and Vehicle Control

1) A visitor is any person not regularly employed in a plant or concern. Strict precautions are
taken with visitor against pilferage, sabotage and other crimes. Plant visitors may and they
can be suppliers, promoters, collectors, customers, government inspectors, contractors, job-
seekers, group visitors, guided tours etc.
2) Passes or badge may be issued to visitors indicating area to be visited and escort
requirements. Likewise movement of packages should be controlled, closely inspecting all
incoming and outgoing packages, with inspection to vehicles. Trucks have been found to
have special components, items placed inside the spare tire, tool boxes, and even in fake
gasoline tanks.
The Pass/Badge System
A pass or badge is issued by security personnel to be admitted in the installation.
This system precludes those visitors with escorts and personnel in the access list. The
pass system is for general use and not for the restricted areas like exclusive, limited and
controlled areas. The following are recommended:
1) Single Pass or Badge System - Pass is issued for permission to enter differing in
specific areas by letters, numerals, or colors e.g. green background of current passes in
the general area, or white pass with overprinted blue symbols for a certain specific area.
2) Pass of Badge Exchange System- Multiple copies of passes are issued to an
individual with the same photograph. The individual exchange his badge for another color
or marking at the gate. Once inside, if he needs to enter a restricted area, he exchanges
it for one another color acceptable in that area.

Specification for Using Chain – Link Fences

1) It must be constructed of 7-foot material excluding top guard.
2) It must be 9 gauge or heavier.
3) Mesh openings are not to be larger than 2 inches per side.
4) It should be twisted and barded salvage at top and bottom
5) It should be securely fastened to rigid metal or reinforced concrete.
6) It must reach within 2 inches of hand ground or paving.
7) It must reach below surface deep enough on soft grounds to compensate for shifting
sail or sand.

Specification for using Barbed wire

1) Standard barbed wire is twisted, double standard, 12-gauge wire, with 4-point
barbs spaced on equal distance apart.
2) Barbed wire or fencing must be firmly affixed to post high excluding top guards.
3) Barbed wire fencing should not be less than 7 feet high excluding top guard
4) The distance between the strands will not exceed 6 inches and midway between
parts.

Specification on Clear Zones

1) A clear zone of 20 feet or more should exist between the perimeter barriers and
exterior structures, parking areas and natural or man-made features.
2) A clear zone of 50 feet or more should exist between the perimeter barriers and
exterior structures within the protected areas expect areas when a building wall
constitutes parts of the perimeter barrier.
Specification for Windows or Opening
Windows and openings must be less than 18 feet above the ground, roofs,
ledges, etc. or less than 14 feet directly or diagonally opposite in controlled windows in
other walls, fire escapes, or other openings of 96 square inches or larger should be
grilled or have steel bar protections.

74 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

4. Security Lighting
Security Lightning provides sufficient illumination to areas during hours of darkness.

Purpose of security Lightning

1) It improves visibility so that intruders can be seen, identified or apprehend.
2) It gives psychological fear, which serves as a deterrent to thieves, pilferers,
trespassers, and sabotage.
3) It makes easier. The routine work of guards in identifying employees, vehicles etc.
during night time.
4) If placed in certain areas, may even reduce the number of stationary guards, and
instead, may require only roving patrols at night.

Types of Security Lightning

1. Stationary Luminary- most common type consisting of series of fixed luminous flood
a given area continuously with overlap. It is commonly used on entry gates of employees and
vehicles.
1.1 Glare projection type- the intensity is focused to the intruder while the guard
remains in the comparative darkness. The lightning is toward the approach of an
entrance to an installation.
1.2 Controlled lightning- the width of a lighted atop can be controlled and
adjusted to suit the security needs. The lightning is focused on a pile of items,
rather than on a background.
2. Stand-by-Lightning- similar to continuous lightning but it turned on manually or by
special devise or other automatic means, when there is a suspicion of entry.
3. Movable Lightning- consist of stationary or portable, manually operated search lights
which may be lighted continuously during hours of darkness or only as needed, and usually
supplementary to either of the stationary luminary and stand by lightning.
4. Emergency Lightning- a stand-by lightning which can be utilized in the vent of
electrical failure, either due to local equipment or commercial power failure.
5. Protective Alarms
Alarm is an aural or visual signal given by the annunciator to security when intruder
actuates device in protected at area. An annunciator is a visual or audible signaling device,
which initiates conditions of associated circuits.

Types of Protective Alarm

1) Central Station System- Several separate compounds tie their alarm system
to central station so that in case of need, the central station calls for assistance to the
police, fire department, hospital or with other government assisting units.
2) Propriety System- Similar to the central station type except that the propriety
console is located inside the subscriber’s installation who owns or bases the system.
3) Auxiliary System- An installation-owned system which is direct extension of
the local enforcement agency and/or fire department by special arrangements.
4) Local Alarm System- Consists of rigging up a visual or audible alarm near
the object to be protected. In case of alarm, response will be made by the local guards
and other personnel within sight or hearing.

Operation of Intrusion Alarm System

1) Breaking an electrical circuit ( Metallic fore or wire )- In a building or
compound, all possible points of entry can be wired by using electrically charged strips of
tinfoil wire. Any action that will move the foil or wire breaks the circuit and activate the
alarm.
2) Interruption of a light beam (photoelectric or electric eye)- This system
uses a photoelectric-cell or the “Electric Eye” which operates on the principal of light of
rays. In this system an invisible light beam is transmitted to a special receiver. An infra-
red filter over the light source makes the beam invisible to intruders.
3) Detection of sound and vibration (audio detection device) - this can be
utilized effectively to safeguard enclosed area such as vaults, safes, storage bins, file
rooms, warehouses and similar enclosures. Supersensitive tiny microphones are
embedded in the walls, ceilings and floors of the enclosure to be protected by sound
vibrations. These microphones distributed evenly can detect sound or vibrations of sound
caused by attempts to force entry into the protected area.
4) Space and motion detection (vibration detection device) – This system
derived their operating principle usually from a physical phenomenon known as “

75 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Doppler Effect”. Constant sound waves in cubicle disturbed by an object will cause
change of frequent and wave motion thereby causing an alarm to trigger.
5) Electronic/Electromagnetic fence (microwave motion detection) – An
electronic fence consisting of 3 to 5 strands of wire spaced from 9 to 24 inches above
one another which serves as antenna, a monitor panel, and an electric circuitry. When
power is put on, an electro-magnetic field is set among the wires from the top to the
ground. An intruder about 2 fee from this field will trigger an alarm. This system is
suggested to be located inside the chain-link fencing to minimize nuisance alarms caused
by animals, debris blown by the wind etc.

6. Protective Locks and Key Control

Lock is defined as mechanical, electrical, Hydraulic, or electronic device designed to
prevent entry to building, room, container, or hiding place.
General Groups of Locks
1. Warded Lock –The underlying principle is the incorporation of wards or obstructions
inside the lock to prohibit a key from operating the bolt unless the key has corresponding
notches cut in it that it will pass the words.
2. Lever Tumble Lock – Each lever hinges on a fixed point and is held against a stop by
the pressure of flat spring.
3. Disc Tumbler Lock – Also known as the wofer tumbler type, has flat metal tumblers
with open center fitted into a lock case.
4. Pin Tumbler Lock – The pin tumbler mechanism depends for its security, on a
number of round pin or tumblers operating on cylinder.
Padlock – A portable and detachable lock having a pivoted or sliding hasp which
possess through a staple ring, or the like and is made fast or secured.
Combination Locks – A lock that requires manipulation of parts according to a
predetermined combination code of numbers or letters.
Coded Lock - A type of lock that can be opened by inserting a coded card in a slot in the
lock, or by pushing the correct buttons on the surface of the lock.
Electronic Lock – Type of lock that can be closed and opened remotely by electronic
means.

7. Key Control Defined

Key Control is being defined as the management of keys in a plant or business
organization to prevent unauthorized individual access to the keys.
Master Key – A special key capable of opening a series of locks. This key is capable of
opening less number of locks than the grand master
Maison Keying – Key to open the main entrance and the office
Master Keying System – A system used in a big installation whereby keys can open a
group or groups of locks.

Levels of control in the Master Keying Plan

1) One Level (Change Key) – All locks operated by change key only and keyed different
or alike or required. Each key operates its own lock only, e.g. house, stores, cars,
warehouses.
2) Two levels (Master Key) – All levels operated by change keys and master key. Mater
key operates all locks generally of one building, e.g. small school apartment.
3) Three Levels (Grand Master Key) – All locks operated by change key, master keys,
and grand master keys. Grand master operates all locks generally used in large buildings or a
facility with several buildings e.g. office buildings and hospitals.
4) Four Levels (Great Grand Master Key) – All locks operated by change key, Grand
master key and great grand master keys. Used in great or large complex system and similar
to three levels.
5) Fire Levels (Great Great Grand Master Key) – All locks operated by change key,
master key, grand master key and great grand master key, e.g. big universities, complexes,
large industrial complexes.

8. Fire Protection
1) Automatic Sprinkler- Type of built in sprinklers which works by the increase of room
temperature and which automatically operates the system to put out of fire. Attached and
distributed in the ceiling of the rooms, these sprinklers will go into action once a fire starts, and
those that will open are that are directly above the fire and water is delivered where it is needed.

Types of Sprinkler System

a) Wet pipe system – the piping has water with pressure, and the water sprinkler will
operate when head is open and water will continue to flow until shut off.

76 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

b) Dry-pipe system – the pipes are filled with air under pressures which holds the water
at a value located room. When sprinklers head goes into operation, air is released trapping
the dry pipe valve and allowing water to flow through the system.

2) Fire Pump -A mechanical device of supplying water which can be manual or motor-driven.
These pumps are ideal when natural supplies of water are readily available like a river, lake or
stream.
3) Stand Pipes- G.I. steel or plastic pipes located inside a building from the lowest to the top
floor with water under pressure for use in case of fire. Located near a standpipe is a fire hose
usually enclosed in glass box handy for use. In case of fire, the hose is screwed into the
standpipe can come form a storage tank at the roof or from a series of water pumps.
4) Fire Hydrant - A mechanical device strategically located in an installation or street where
a fire hose is connected so that water with pressure will be available to extinguished a fire.
5) Fire Extinguisher -Fire fighting equipment which can be portable or in a cart that is used
to put out fire depending on the contents to extinguish certain types of fire as class A to D. this is
the most important and useful piece of fire fighting equipment in plant, building or facilities.

Classes of fire
1) Class A Fires – results from burning of woods, paper, textiles and other carbonaceous
materials. Extinguishments of this type is by quenching and cooling, Extinguisher which
have water sand, acid, foam and the special solution of alkalai methyl dust, as found in
the load stream extinguisher, should be use for this type of fire.
2) Class B Fires – those caused by flammable liquids like kerosene, gasoline, benzene,
oil products, alcohol and other hydrocarbon derivations. This type is put out and
controlled by foam, load stream, carbon dioxide, dry chemical and vaporizing liquid. If
water is used, it might even spread the flame, explosion may ensure.
3) Class C Fires – those which start in live electrical wire, equipment, motors, electrical
appliances, and telephone switchboards. The extinguisher that should be used for such
fires are carbon dioxide, dry chemical and vaporizing liquid, as the soda type can even
electrocute the extinguisher holder. In case of fires, source of electricity should be cut off.
4) Class D fires - the result of combustion of certain metals in firely divided forms. These
metals can be magnesium, potassium, powder aluminum, zinc, sodium, titanium, lithium,
and zirconium. This type of fire can be put out by G.I Type meth LX, Lith X, meth L KYL,
dry sands and dry talc.

Use of fire Extinguisher

1) Soda Acid (Class A Fire) - It is carried to fire by top handle. Operate by turning
extinguishers upside down. Don’t invert until ready to see. Aim stream at base of flame
working around the edge. Soak to prevent rekindling.
2) Carbon Dioxide – CO2 (Class B, C Fire) – Operates by squeezing handle or trigger
or turning wheel to discharge gas and snow. When using, keep hands on horn, gets cold,
be ready for a “ROAR” its normal. Avoid close blasting on liquid fires. Attack fire at base
of flame, moving discharge horn slowly back and forth in sweeping motion. Continue after
fire is out; prevent flare up
3) Dry Chemical-Multi-Purpose (Class A,B,C Fires ) – Operates same as the dry
chemical type above. Coat class A combustible thoroughly. DO not mix with dry chemical
designed only for class B and C fires.
4) Foam (Class A,B, Fires) – Operates like soda acid; operates by turning extinguisher
upside down.

B. Personnel Security
Involves the background check of individuals commensurate with the security
requirements of their work.

Purpose of Personnel Security

1) To insure that a firm hires those employees best suited for the firm; and
2) Once hired, to assist in providing the necessary security to these employees while they are
carrying out their functions

Key Functions of Personnel Security

1) It serves as screening device in hiring a suitable employees
2) It Provides background investigation services both potential and present employees,
for possible assignment to a sensitive position
3) It handles investigation of employees suspected of wrongdoing
4) It develops security awareness among employees
5) It attempts to ensure the protection of employees from discriminatory hiring or
terminating procedures as well as unfounded allegations of illegal or unethical activities
and conduct.

77 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Applicant Screening
The most effective tools in employee selection are:
1) The application form; and
2) The interview

Major Scope of Personnel Security

1. Personnel Security Investigation (PSI)
A process of inquiry into the character, reputation, discretion, integrity, morals
and loyalty of an individual to determine his suitability for appointment or access to classified
matter.

Types of PSI
1) National Agency Check
2) Local Agency Check
3) Partial Background Investigation
4) Complete Background Investigation

General Techniques in Personnel Security Investigation

1) Background Investigation – It is an inquiry which aims to verify applicant’s
information written at the applications form; to ascertain his/her past employment experiences
and to obtain other information pertinent to the decision to employ.

Factors to be Considered in the Conduct of BI

a) Loyalty – faithful allegiance to the Philippine Government and its duly constituted
authorities.
b) Integrity – uprightness in character, soundness of moral principle and freedom from
moral delinquencies
c) Discretion – the ability or tendency to act or decide with prudence, habits of wise
judgment.
d) Morals – distinctive identifying qualities which serve as an index to the essential or
intrinsic nature of a person.
e) Character – the sum of traits that have impressed by nature, education and habit upon
the individual
f) Reputation – opinion or estimation in which one is generally held. It is what a person is
reported to be.

Investigative Coverage
a) Prior employment for at least the last seven (7) years should be verified. When
contacting previous employers, one can explain that the subject is being considered “for
a position of trust” gaps of greater than one month should be investigated.
b) Claimed education should be checked as far as it relates to the needs of the job.
c) Claimed residence for the period covered in the employment and educational institutes
should be verified.
d) If the candidate indicates a criminal record then the details should be checked.

2) Positive Vetting - The process of inspecting or examining with careful thoroughness.

The essence of vetting that it is a personal interview, conducted under stress. It is based on
information previously given by applicant. Other information is used during the interview, such
as those discovered in the B.I., which confirms or denies those given by the applicant.

3) Profiling – The process whereby a subject’s reaction in a future critical situation is

predicted by observing his behavior, or by interviewing him, or analyzing his responses to a
questionnaire, such as an honesty.

2. Security Education
The exposure and teaching of employees on security and its relevance to their work.
Security education is conducted to develop security awareness among employees of the
company. It should cover all employees, regardless of rank or position.

C. Protection of Sensitive Information (Information Security)

Information Cycle
1. The Creation – information is discovered and develop
2. Used – some action is taken with the information
3. Storage and Retrieval – stored for future use
4. Transfer – transferring of information from active to inactive use

78 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

5. Disposition – decision may be made to retain the information indefinitely at either an

active or an inactive storage center or to dispose it

Kinds of Sensitive Information

1. Proprietary Information – an information which in some special way is related to the
status, operations or activities of the possessor over which the possessor asserts
ownership. In the business community, it relates to the structure, products, or business
methods of the organization.
2. Trade Secret – trade secret may consist of any formula, pattern device or compilation
of advantage over competitors who do not know or use it. It may be a formula for a
chemical compound, a process of manufacturing, treating or preserving materials, a
pattern for a machine or other device, or a list of customers. A trade secret is a process
or device for continuous use in the operation of the business.
3. Patent – a grant made by a Government to an inventor, conveying and securing to him
the exclusive rights to make, use and sell his invention for a term of seventeen years. In
the Philippines, patent protection is covered by the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Act
of 1998.

Threats to the Protection of Sensitive Information

1. Competitive Intelligence – a systematic program for gathering and analyzing
information about competitor’s activities and general business trends to further
company’s goals. When practiced responsibly, it is legal and ethical, although some
companies have been known to cross the line-stealing information, wiretapping phones,
and burglarizing offices- entering the darker realm of “Industrial Espionage”

General Types of Competitive Intelligence

1) White – that which is available from company publications, public records or
commercial reporting sources.
2) Grey – that is not readily available but which is usually can be obtained without
acquiring any civil/criminal liability in the process.
3) Black – that which is obtained through clearly unethical or illegal means and if
discovered can result in civil and/or criminal sanctions
2. Eavesdropping (Unauthorized listening) – knowingly and without lawful authority,
entering into a private place with intent to listen surreptitiously to private conversations or
to observe to of any other persons or persons there or installing or using outside a private
place any device for hearing, recording, amplifying, or broadcasting sounds originating in
such place, which sounds would not ordinarily be audible or comprehensible outside,
without consent of any person or persons entitled to privacy.
3. Wiretapping – interception of a communication’s circuit.
4. Bugging – interception of communication using an electronic device.

Areas Where Sensitive Information May Be Lost

Trash, Fake proposals for mergers, joint ventures or licensing arrangements,
Fake job interviews, plant tours, irresponsible company sales representative, suppliers,
consultants, company in-house publications, employees.

Some Typical Sources of Industrial Spies

Romantic partners inside the company, Personnel who are or can be interested
in the possibility of improving their careers elsewhere, Unauthorized access to premises,
Examination of target company’s waste. Also referred to as “trash cover”, connivance
with insiders

Suggested Security Measures

1) Responsibility for information security must be defined, assigned, and broadly
announced.
2) Security audits should be regularly performed, and where deficiencies are noted and
corrected.
3) Employees should be reminded frequently of their continuing responsibility to
protecting the company’s sensitive information.

Technical Countermeasures
1) Physical search such as movement and examination of all furniture, walls mismatched
paints, new plaster; tracing of wires pulling out of light switches; examination ventilation
duct and ceiling
2) Telephone search
3) Electronic Search

79 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Business Records Protection

Types of Business Records

1) Class I – Vital Records – include records that are irreplaceable; records of which
reproduction does not have the same value as the original; records needed to recover
cash to replace buildings, equipment, raw materials, finish products and records needed
to avoid delay and restoration of product, sales, and services.
2) Class II – Important Records – include records of the reproduction of which will
involve considerable expense and labor, or considerably be delay that operating
statistical records belong to this class as well as those to maintain checks on efficiencies,
operating cost, etc. Also included are contracts, customer’s credit files, sales record,
designs in process development, records of experiments in progress, etc.
3) Class III – Useful Records – includes records which loss might cause inconvenience
but could be readily replaced and which would not in the meantime present an
insurmountable obstacle to prompt restoration of business.
4) Class IV – Non-Essential Records – are the daily files routine in nature so that even
if lost or destroyed, will not affect operation or administration.

The Storage Containers

1) Safe – a metallic container used for the safekeeping of documents or small items in
office or installation. Safes can be classified as either robbery resistance and burglary
resistance depending upon the use and need. Many safes are required to be installed in
steel-lad concrete blocks to prevent being carted away by burglars.
2) Vault – a heavily constructed fire and burglar-resistant container usually a part of the
building structure used to keep and protect cash, documents, and negotiable instrument.
Vaults are bigger than safes but smaller than security file room
3) File Room – a cubicle in a building constructed a little lighter than a vault but of bigger
size to accommodate limited people to work on the records inside.

Categories of Storage Container

1) Class 1. – commercial record safes designed for fire protection
2) Class 2. – commercial money safes designed for robbery and burglary protection
3) Class 3. – security cabinets designed to meet specifications for safeguarding
classification materials.

Some Test for Safe’s Fire Resistance

1) Fire Endurance Test- a safe should not have at any one time a temperature above
350 degrees Fahrenheit.
2) Explain Hazard Test- test to determine if the sudden rise in temperature will not
cause the safe to rupture. If the safe can withstand 2000 degrees Fahrenheit for 30
minutes and will not crack or open, then it has passed the explosion test.
3) Fire and Impact Test- aimed at determining the strength of a safe to withstand the
collapse of a building during fire.
.
IV. Security Surveys and Inspections

A. Definitions

Security Surveys - a fact finding probe to determine a plant’s adequacy and deficiency
in all aspects of security, with the corresponding recommendations.

It is a thorough on-site examination and analysis of a facility to determine what

assets are present and their value; to evaluate the existing security program; to identify
differences or excesses; to determine the protection needed; and to support
recommendations to improve overall security.

A formal process used to review specific areas, applications, or processes of a

business or residence to document risk and security vulnerabilities and/or validate the
program in place.It include a complete examination of the property, premises, facility,
office; its occupants, workers, and even visitors, its operations and routine concerning
personnel and company assets.

Survey- term applied to the first detailed “look-see” conducted by team.

Inspections or follow-up surveys- the terms used for succeeding surveys after the
initial survey.

80 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Supplemental Surveys- one conducted when there is a business reorganization with

corresponding changes in objectives and physical by-outs of the complex.

Special surveys- one directed by management, if the initial survey appear s to have left
certain proportions or aspects involving security due to change in policy or operations
that will greatly affect the total security picture.
Entrance Conference- A conference or dialogue between the survey team and
management officials of a plant before security survey is conducted.

Exit Conference – A conference similar to entrance conference done after the

completion of the security survey.

Who Performs Security Audit and Surveys?- Security survey is performed by qualified
security expert who can be from the organization or outsiders contracted to do job.
Recommendations will fall into three categories: (a) human guard; (b) equipment; and
(c) procedures.

B. Objectives of Security Survey

1. To measure the security that is currently in place;

2. To identify and quantify any weaknesses in the current security plan; and 
3. To determine the degree of protection required.

C. Steps in Conducting Security Survey

Step 1-Preparation will give you an idea of what you will cover in the survey and give
you more chance to identify effective measures to reduce the opportunities for crime.
 
Preparation should include:
a) What crime is already in the area?
b) Have you or anyone nearby been a victim of crime?
c) Is there a Business Watch or Neighbourhood Watch Scheme in the area?
d) What are the possible targets?
e) How high is the risk against those targets and what effect will it have?

Step 2- Start with looking around your area, the streets, industrial estate, retail
park, pedestrian walkways. If the area is well maintained it will give the impression that it
is cared for and that security measures are in place. Look to see what might help a
criminal – trees, walls, bushes to hide behind. A well maintained area will increase the
effort it will take to commit a crime and increase the risk of being caught in the act.
 
Step 3- Check out your boundaries. Walk around the area, check for weak
areas. Make sure all the boundaries are secure and well maintained, especially
where not clearly visible. Entrances should be secured when frequent access is
not required. Consider what opportunities has a criminal got to climb walls or
fences, such as a bin, targets for arson such as bins or skips, accessible tools or
materials to help break in hiding places, and areas of poor lighting and visibility
from outside
 
Step 4- Look at the building, including walls, windows, doors, skylights and
roof.  Include sheds, outside storage areas, garages, cellars and air vents.  Consider any
gaps where a tool could be used to open an entry point or window. Introduce measures
that will put off potential criminals – the longer the criminal is visible from the
outside and the more noise they make, the easier it is for them to be noticed.
 
Step 5- Consider your existing locking mechanisms – are they sufficient? Doors
must be fitted with locks tested; must normally fitted to high security doors for homes and
businesses; secure unattended external doors; and check fire door mechanisms work
correctly.
 
Also, windows should have locks which are secured with a key. For businesses
in medium to high risk areas, additional physical security can be added such as grills,
shutters, mesh and hatch covers, reinforcing bars, laminated glass and tinted glass to
reduce visibility of valuable items.
 

81 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

Step 6- Inside your premises, take account of your assets.  Take note of the
make, model and serial number of equipment.  Consider security marking your
equipment. If possible, high value equipment, or equipment essential for a
business, should be secured in a separate room with controlled access. If there is
an alarm fitted check that it works and that it is serviced regularly.  Consider who
monitors it and who will respond to an alarm activation.
 
Step 7- When you have finished your survey you will be able to highlight any
security risks, threats and possible targets.  You can then devise a plan which could
involve adding additional lighting, cutting back hedges, increasing security to access
points, setting up computer passwords, carrying equipment in the boot of the car,
removing equipment from a vehicle overnight, making sure equipment is stored securely
and doors are locked to the room containing the equipment.
 
Keep notes on your security survey and review it to make sure nothing has been
left out. Businesses also need to consider the control of stock, staff procedures, staff
personal safety and staff confidentiality.
 

D. The Security Survey as Part of a Risk Assessment

Companies face greater and greater challenges every year as they address potential
and actual losses from theft, terrorism, and natural disasters.  As the threats have increased,
many savvy business managers have begun to come to terms with the consequences of not
being proactive in addressing these threats.  A thorough security survey, conducted as part of
a larger risk assessment, will be any business manager’s most valued asset when
addressing these potential sources of loss.
Prior to beginning a security survey, companies will need to identify and have a clear
understanding of exactly what needs to be protected.  The assets that most companies are
looking to protect consist of their employees, customers, facilities, and proprietary information.
Because every company is different, the particular threats that each faces will be different and
also have varying levels of criticality.
Criticality is a risk management concept that refers to the impact that the loss of a
particular asset will have on the business as a whole.  The criticality of any asset should be
based on more than just the cost of replacement.  It should also take into account the cost of
putting temporary assets in place, cost of downtime, and increases in insurance rates.  The
process of defining criticality is usually done during a Business Impact Analysis (BIA).
Once the questions of what needs to be protected are answered, a thorough security
survey  can be conducted.  The security survey will be the foundation for designing a security
plan to address the company’s physical security requirements.

E. Inspections and Surveys

Inspections and surveys are valuable tools to a physical-security program. These
tools collectively measure and identify the readiness of a physical-security program.
Security inspections are conducted at the installations, activities, and facilities by
trained security inspectors. Some facilities on an installation may be exempt from inspection
due to their mission. These facilities are inspected under the guidance of regulations and
directives unique to those activities. It is a recorded assessment of physical-security
procedures and measures implemented by a unit or an activity to protect its assets.
While security survey is a comprehensive analysis of a company’s premises, systems,
and procedures to measure the security that is currently in place; identify and quantify any
weaknesses in the current security plan; and determine the degree of protection required.
After the security survey is complete, there should be enough information to make
recommendations for improving the current security program.  Conducting a security survey
should only be performed by professionals who have extensive training and experience in
performing these surveys.
The security survey is great tool that should be part of any company’s security program.
But it should not be confused with the overall risk assessment that company’s should be
conducting and/or evaluating regularly.

F. Security Inspection Requirements and Procedures

1. Liaison and coordination should be established with other agencies on the
installation before an inspection. The director of facility engineers can provide
information to benefit the overall security program.
2. A security library is necessary to help personnel prepare for and conduct an
inspection. This library may include the mission and history of each activity to be
inspected; previous inspection reports; a copy of the most current risk analysis; and
the SOPs specific to physical security.

82 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

3. Entrance interviews are usually required before the actual inspection. During the
interview, the inspector establishes a rapport with the unit representative. The
inspector identifies the following during the interview:
a) All members of the inspection team.
b) An overview of the last inspection.
c) Areas to be inspected and the order of inspection.
d) A review of waivers, work orders, and exceptions.
e) Changes to the unit's mission (if any).
4. The inspection should be conducted from the outside to the inside of the facility,
activity, or area with regard to the following:
a) Observation of the facility will be conducted during all hours of the day.
b) Interviews of managerial and operational personnel will be performed.
c) Security forces should be inspected so as not to disrupt the mission (if
possible).
d) An assessment should be made of security-force training, especially if
security-force knowledge proves inadequate.
e) Inspection of entry and movement control by the guard force should not
hinder operations.
f) All communications systems used by the guard force should be thoroughly
inspected. The guard force should have two reliable and efficient means of
communication, one of which is a radio.
g) Inspections should be conducted according to regulations appropriate for the
facility.
5. Exit interviews should be conducted as soon as possible after the inspection. The
Chief Security should be informed of any deficiencies or compliments noted. A
rating on the inspection's results will not be provided during the exit interview. The
approving authority, not the inspector, will determine the inspection rating. The
rating will be forwarded to the unit along with the final report.
6. Recommendations will be made according to regulations. Written reports should be
forwarded through channels in a timely manner according to the SOP.

G. Security Survey Vs. Security Inspections

A physical-security survey differs from an inspection in that a survey covers a formal

assessment of an installation's physical-security program. Each survey includes a complete
reconnaissance, study, and analysis of installation property and operations. The survey
provides the commander with an assessment of the installation's overall security posture. It
consists of the threat and the mission, and it advises the commander on the installation's
physical-security program's strengths and weaknesses. The physical-security survey is a
formal recorded assessment of an installation's physical-security program.
Security Inspection is "a check of how well existing security measures and
regulations are being carried out within a command." Security survey is different from
security inspection in that the former is a counterintelligence service to assist heads of office
in determining the security measures required to protect key installations from possible
sabotage, espionage, subversion, and unauthorized disclosure/s of, or access to classified
information or material contained therein.

H. Stages of Security Inspection

1. Evaluation - The evaluative fact finding inspection is generally positive in tone and
promotes liaison and security awareness while taking a broad, general outlook of a
facility or program. Deficiencies, which may be resolved either on the spot or within a
non-specific time frame, may be noted and recommendations for further corrective
actions may be made. The evaluation inspection can also help management officials
in planning or upgrading their security programs.
2. Compliance - The full compliance inspection is generally conducted for enforcement
purpose. It focuses on compliance with established standards or regulations.
3. Follow-up - Another form of compliance inspection is the follow-up inspection,
conducted to ensure that facility officials have complied with recommendations from
earlier inspections.
4. After hours room check - The after-hours room check is a form of compliance
inspection. It monitors compliance with security regulations especially involving areas
where national security information is processed or stored.
5. Self-inspection - This is initiated by the security officer of facility manager to evaluate
his/her own security program. Additionally, this is required by each top secret control
officer, classified document custodian, and special security officer to evaluate all

83 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

security procedures applicable to their operation. The scope and purpose of the self-
inspection for an office, building, or other facility is determined by the initiator.
6. Close-out - A close-out self-inspection is accomplished immediately prior to the
action to administratively terminate an authorized top secret control station, classified
control station or sensitive compartmentalization information facility (if any). During
close-out inspections, all areas and containers authorized for the storage of classified
material are checked to ensure all classified material has been removed.

I. Basic Steps in Security Inspection

1. Plan an inspection by determining the scope, type, and method.  Schedule it,  and if
appropriate provide written notice. It should provide the date (s), purpose, proposed
interview schedule, and request for any information needed by the security officer.
Review previous inspection reports and prepare a list of question for inspection.
2. Upon arrival at the site and before leaving the place, the inspector should meet with
the senior manager to discuss the inspection. Collect a sufficient sampling of data
from interviews with on-site employees and contractors and from touring the facility.
Obtain information to support findings in the inspection report. Report favorable
findings as well as deficiencies. Check awareness and adherence to local security
procedures. Document any discrepancy/discrepancies corrected on the spot.
3. After sufficient data is collected, the inspector should analyze all findings, compare
them with applicable security regulations, list discrepancies and cite regulatory
references, recommend corrective action, and write the inspection report. 
4. The report should be produced within 10 working days upon completion of the
inspection. It should be distributed to the office, facility or regional manager on time
and require a response to any recommendation/s.

J. Risk Analysis and Security Survey to Protect Assets

The strength of the security professional is in understanding security and risk.

So, the process for defining appropriate security measures and their suitability and fitness
revolves around undertaking a risk analysis and security survey, which should be
methodical, systematic and thorough.
The protection level for a building primarily depends on risk. The risk analysis
identifies probable targets – people, property, information, and the probability and impact
of an attack, while the security survey ensures that all pertinent information to design and
implement commensurate security systems and measures is obtained.

K. Stages in Conducting Risk Analysis and Security Survey

1. Intelligence gathering: collecting information on the organization, its operations
and objectives, followed by a risk assessment to identify assets requiring
protection and their value/attractiveness. As well as defining the threats – break
ins, robbery, arson, trespass, insider attack etcetera – and the type of adversary
likely to be encountered.
2. Obtaining details of the facility, including the location – whether inner city,
commercial rural, etcetera – previous history, boundary, building structure and
condition and any existing protective measures such as alarms, bolts, bars. This
should be a structured process undertaking observations, interviews with key
employees, crime prevention officers and, if possible, insurance assessors. It
should be supplemented with historic data, crime records, site plans and drawings,
where available.
3. Site walk through, or the survey. In the journal task, this would involve
assessing the physical vulnerabilities, current security measures and their
condition, and the types of system and devices to further mitigate the threat. The
survey leads to the system design stage, which takes into account people,
processes and the technology that needs integrating to meet objectives.
Starting with the ABC of risk, area, boundary, contents, is good practice, so
the site survey begins at the boundary working towards the core to ensure a
layered security approach. The shell of the building consists of all parts of the
boundary of the structure: walls, floor, roof, including moveable parts such as
doors and windows.
The shell needs viewing from outside as well as inside to ascertain any weak
points. As well as the outer shell, there may be further shells within that require
protection, for example a storeroom containing high value goods.
As the survey progresses through the building, there needs to be a careful
assessment of the type of security device required and its deployment. It must
take into account any influencing factors that may compromise the level of
security, such as specifying the wrong device, or lead to potential sources of false

84 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

alarms relevant to each technology type, such as water pipes, lighting,

electromechanical interference, extraneous noise, draughts, animals, signs and
stock movement and other special considerations.

V. Organization and Administration of Security Guard Force

R.A. 5487- The Private Security Agency Law- the act which regulates the organization
and operation of private detective, watchman , and security guard agencies in the Philippines
which was approved on June 16, 1969

PNP SAGSD- Philippine National Police Security Agency and Guard Supervision Division
formerly known as Supervisory Office for Security Investigation Agency (SOSIA) – This is an
office under the Chief of PNP through the Civil Security Group (CSP) which is charged with
the supervision, direction and control of all security agencies in the Republic. The head of this
division acts in the name of the Chief of PNP on matters, duties and powers delegated by the
latter.
In matters of licensing and in compliance with the prescribed rules and regulation issued
by the chief of PNP, the security personnel of government corporation/ agencies also fall
under the supervision of the PNP SAGSD.

Note: SAGSD was already restored to its old name SOSIA (Supervisory Office
for Security Investigation Agency)

Branches of the PNP SOSIA

1) Administrative
2) Operations
3) Research, records, and statistics
4) License
5) Special Action

Persons Who Are Qualified to Organize a Security or Watchman Agency.

1. Any Filipino citizen or a corporation, partnership, or association, one hundred percent
(100%) of which is owned and controlled by Filipino citizens, may organize and maintain
a Private Security Agency or Private Detective Agency.
2. The operator or manager of an agency including managers of branch offices must be
a Filipino Citizen, shall not be less than twenty five (25) years of age; college graduate
and or a commissioned officer in the inactive service or retired from the Armed Forces of
the Philippines or the Philippine National Police, or graduated/ taken a course in concepts
and methods in Industrial Security and Security Management and/ or must have
adequate training or experience in security business , of good moral character not having
been convicted of any crime involving moral turpitude.

Disqualification for the Operator or Manager of Security Agency

1. Having been dishonorably discharged or separated from the Armed Forces of the
Philippines or Philippine National Police or separated for cause from any government
entity or government owned or controlled corporation.
2. Being mental incompetent;
3. Being physically unfit;
4. Addicted o the use of narcotic drug and/ or prohibited drugs and/or substances;
5. Habitual drunkard and alcoholic;
6. Dummy of any foreigner;
7. Elective or appointive government officials and employees who may be called upon on
account of the functions of their respective offices in the implementation and enforcement
of RA 5487 and any person related to such government employees by affinity or
consanguinity in the third civil degree shall not hold any interest, directly or indirectly in
any security guard or watchman agency on account of the functions of their respective
offices in the implementation and enforcement of the provisions of Republic Act No.
5487 as amended.

Status of Security Guards

1) In consonance with the existing laws, PDs, Eos and issuance of proper authorities, the
security guards are part of the Citizen’s Armed Force, and auxiliary unit of the PNP in
maintenance of peace and order.
2) Under P.D. 1016, as armed component of the AFP reserved force, it may be called
upon during emergency to render military service/duties to assist in the defense of the
state.

85 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

3) Under the specific provisions of R.A. 5487, the Governor and Mayor are vested the
authority to deputize the security guards to do police work, assisting the PNP in the
maintenance of peace and order during disasters, calamities and emergencies.
4) Each security guard on duty is part of the intelligence network of the PNP in gathering
information on crimes and criminals in their respective area of jurisdiction.

Qualification of Security Guard or Watchman

1) Filipino citizen
2) High school graduate
3) Physically and mentally fit
4) At least eighteen (18) years of age but not more than fifty (50) years old
5) Has undergone Pre-licensing course

Qualifications of a Private Detective

1) Holder of baccalaureate degree or Bachelor of Laws;
2) Holder of a degree of Bachelor of Science in Criminology
3) Graduate of a Criminal Investigation Course offered by then PC-INP or the Philippine
National Police or the National Bureau of Investigation or any police training school or
detective training with authorized/recognized center for security guard
4) Advance ROTC/CMT graduate

Qualifications for Security Consultants

1) Holder of Masters Degree either in Criminology, Public Administration, MNSA,
Industrial Security Administration or Law.
2) Must have at least ten (10) years experience in the operation and management of
security business

Numbers of Security Personnel to be Maintained to Secure Regular License to Operate

1) Private Security Agencies – a minimum of two hundred (200) and a maximum of one
thousand (1000)
2) Company Security Force – a minimum of thirty (30) and a maximum of one thousand
(1000)

Use of Firearms and Equipment by Private Security Agency

Types of Firearms the PSA can possess
1) Shotguns not higher than 12 gauge
2) Low power rifles and revolvers such as: .22 caliber; .38 caliber pistols or revolvers not
exceeding one (1) firearm for every two (2) security guards in its employ.

Numbers of Firearms the PSA can possess

1) For 100 guards, an initial number of at least 30 licensed firearms
2) For regular licensed (200 guards) at least 70 pieces of licensed firearms
3) Use of firearm by Private Detective Agency is optional.

Confiscation of Firearms of Security Guard

1) When the firearm is about to be used in the commission of a crime
2) When the firearm is actually being used in the commission of a crime
3) When the firearm has just been used in the commission of a crime
4) When the firearm being carried is unlicensed or a firearm not authorized by law and
regulation for its use
5) When the confiscation of the firearm is directed by the order of the court
6) When the firearm is used or carried outside the property, compound or establishment
serviced by the agency without proper authority
7) When the security guard does not possess any license to exercise his profession

Revocation of License to Possess Firearms

1) Failure to submit any issued firearm for verification
2) Carrying of firearms by security personnel without appropriate Duty Detailed Order
(DDO)
3) When the firearm serial number has been duplicated on another firearm or using one
firearm license for more than one firearm other than those stipulated in the license.
4) Carrying of firearms outside of the place stated in the permit
5) Conviction of the operator or manager of the agency of any crime involving moral
turpitude
6) When the firearm was reported lost

VII. Security Personnel Ranks, Positions, Staffing Pattern and Job Description
A. Security Management Staff

86 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

1. Security Director (SD) – Agency manager/chief security officer – responsible for

the entire operation and administration/management of the security agency. Directly
responsible to the agency operator/owner/Board of Directors
2. Security Executive Director (SED) – Asst. Agency manager/asst. chief security
officer – automatically the security executive director, assist the agency security
director and take the operational and administrative management when the manager
is absent.
3. Security Staff Director (SSD) – Staff director for operation and staff director for
administration – the staff director for operation is the staff assistant of the security
manager for the efficient operation of the agency. It includes the responsibility to
canvass clientele and the implementation of contract and agreement. He is also
responsible for the conduct of investigation and training; while the staff director for
administration is the staff assistant of the agency manager for the effective and
efficient administration and management of the agency. He is responsible for the
professionalization of the personnel, procurement/recruitment, confirming of awards,
mobility and issuance of firearms.
B. Line Leadership Staff
1. Security Supervisor 3 – Detachment Commanders – the field or area
commander of the agency. The detachment shall consist of several posts.
2. Security Supervisor 2 – Chief Inspector – responsible for inspecting the
entire area covered by the detachment
3. Security Supervisor 1 – Inspector – responsible for the area assigned by the
Chief Inspector or the Detachment Commander.
C. Security Guard
1. Security Guard 1 – Watchman/Guard – person posted as watchman and/or
guard
2. Security Guard 2 – Shift In-Charge – responsible for the security officers
who are scheduled in a certain shift for a particular period.
3. Security Guard 3 – Post In-Charge – responsible for the entire detailed
security office with a certain establishment
 Security Consultant – optional but must possess all qualification.

VIII. The Security Guard Force

A group of forces of men selected, trained and/or grouped into a functional unit
for the purpose of protecting operational processes from disruptions which would impede
efficiency or halt operations at a particular plant, facility, installation or special activity.
Types of Guard Forces:
1. Company Guard Forces – proprietary or in-house security
2. Agency Guard Services – contractual
3. Government Guard Forces – new type

Advantages of Organizing and Operating of Company Guard Forces

1) Loyalty to the organization is more intense than in agency guards
2) Generally, higher caliber men are employer is they received higher wages, benefits and
other allowances, and may be even required to undergo specialized training at company’s
direction.
3) Highly classified work can be given to guards after proper training and indoctrination due to
non-rotation of organic guards.
4) Company guards are more familiar with the facilities they protect, and can be trained to
handle some of the more complex security duties
Disadvantages of Company Guard Force
1) Cost more
2) Problem of insuring availability of back up personnel
3) May be required to join a guard union
Advantages of Agency Guard Services
1) It is more economical
2) Security administrative problems are reduced investigation and training are eliminated
3) Problems related to recruiting, re-employment investigation and training are eliminated
4) Problems involving absentees and vacation leaves are eliminated
5) Security personnel are separated from employees. Camaraderie is eliminated
6) In case of accidents or deaths, agency takes care of the cumbersome details
7) In case of emergencies, extra guards are easily available
8) In case of company strikes, the agency guards will on duty to carry out their assigned
duties
Arrest by Security Guards
1) A security guard or private detective is not a peace officer and is not, therefore, clothed
with police authority. However, he may effect arrest/apprehension under any of the following
circumstances:

87 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

2) When the person to be arrested is actually committing, or is about to commit an offense in

his presence;
3) When an offense has in fact been committed, and he has reasonable ground to believe
that the person to be arrested has committed it;
4) When the person to be arrested is a prisoner who has escaped from a penal establishment
or place where he is serving final judgment or temporarily confined while his case is pending,
or has escaped while being transferred from one confinement to another
General orders (11 GOs)
1) To take charge of the post and all company properties in view and protect the same
with outmost diligence;
2) To walk in an alert manner during my tour of duty and observing everything that takes
place within sight and hearing;
3) To report all violations of regulations and orders I am instructed to enforce;
4) To relay all calls from post more distant from the security house where I am stationed;
5) To quit my post only when properly relieved;
6) To receive, obey and passed on to the relieving guard all orders from company officers
or officials, supervisors, post in-charge or shift leaders;
7) To talk to no one except in the line of duty;
8) To sound or call the alarm in case of fire or disorder;
9) To call the superior officer in any case not covered by instructions
10) To salute and/or bow all company officials, superiors in the agency, ranking public
officials and officers of the Philippine National Police;
11) To be specially watchful at night during the time of challenging, to challenge all
persons on or near my post and to allow no one to pass or loiter without proper authority
Training System and Its Duration Period
Objectives of Training
1) To upgrade the discipline, competence and efficiency of security guards/private
detectives;
2) To educate them on the importance of national and community security needs on
prevention of losses;
3) To enhance a highly professionalized security industry in the country
Classification and Duration Period of Training
1) Basic security guard course (pre-licensing training course) – 150 hours
2) Re-training course – 48 hours
3) Security officers training course – 300 hours
4) Basic security supervisory course – 48 hours
5) Security supervisor development course
6) Other specialized courses

-ooOoo-

88 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

POST TEST ON POLICE ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION

Instruction: Select the correct answer for each of the following

questions.

1. A state of mind that reflects personnel’s confidence in his

organization and his work group is known as –
A. Morale C. Confidence
B. Moral D. Camaraderie

2. The Philippine National Police (PNP) personnel are considered

servants of the community and its effectiveness depends upon
community’s approval. What theory of police service does the PNP
adopts?
A. Continental C. Home Rule
B. Contemporary D. Traditional

3. The PNP envisions itself that by 2030 it shall be a highly

capable, effective and credible police service working in
partnership with a responsive community towards the attainment of
a safer place to live, work, invest and do business. This could
be achieved by enforcing the law, prevent and control crimes,
maintain peace and order, and to ensure public safety and
internal security with the active support of the community. This
vision and mission manifest that the PNP adopts the _____________
of policing.
A. Modern concept C. Traditional concept
B. Old concept D. Conventional concept

4. The word “POLICE” has originated from the Greek word POLITEIA,
which means –
A. an agency charged to enforce the law
B. a person who enforces the law
C. a government of a city
D. internal organization or regulation of a State

5. Police service is founded on the two theories, the Continental

Theory and the Home Rule Theory. The Home Rule Theory considers
the policemen as:
1. servants of the community, who depend for the
effectiveness of their functions upon the express wishes of
the people.
2. civil employees whose primary duty is the preservation of
the public peace and security.
3. armed elements of the government whose job is to serve and
protect
A. 1 and 2 only C. 1 and 3 only
B. 2 and 3 only D. 1, 2 and 3

6. What concept of policing that considers the police

organization as a mere repressive machinery whose basis of
efficiency is more on arrest of criminals and punishment is the
only instrument of crime control?
A. Old Concept C. Classical Concept
B. Modern Concept D. Crime Control

89 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

7. Police organizations were established with objectives to pursue.

Which of the following are the common general objectives of the
police?
1. To ensure that there is an order in the community
2. To protect the lives and limbs of every member of the
community
3. To arrest the criminals and bring them to prison
4. To protect the properties of the citizenry and render
appropriate assistance to other government office concerned
A. 1, 2, 3 and 4 C. 1, 2 and 3 only
B. 1, 2 and 4 only D. 1, 3 and 4 only

8. Crime prevention is the foremost among police functions. What

does it mean?
A. Elimination or reduction of the desire to commit crime
B. Neutralization of criminal activity by proper enforcement
of criminal laws
C. Enforcement of rules and regulations and ordinances all
aimed at achieving a desired uniform standard of activity
among members of society
D. Police visibility to eliminate desire, opportunity and
instruments of crime

9. Police activities are generally categorized into, primary or

line, secondary or administrative, support or auxiliary. Which of
the following are classified as line police activities?
1. Patrol work, traffic control/management and criminal
investigation
2. Laboratory, jail or custody maintenance and identification.
3. Transportation, communication, property supply and records
4. Juvenile and vice control
5. Personnel, inspection, planning activities, budgeting,
training and public relations
A. 1 and 4 C. 3 and 4
B. 2 and 3 D. 4 and 5

10. How will you categorized police patrol and traffic

investigation functions of the PNP?
A. Line C. Field
B. Staff D. Technical

11. PSSg Dino is investigating homicide case involving a taxi

driver who was stabbed by unknown assailant while the former was
eating tokneneng in Recto corner Avenida. Dino performs what
police function?
A. Crime prevention C. Order maintenance
B. Crime control D. Administering justice

12. Pat Val is undertaking his Police on-the-job training by

which he is deployed in LRT Central Station ensuring that
commuters observe physical distancing. Pat Val performs which
police function?
A. Crime control
B. Regulations of non-criminal conduct
C. Crime prevention
D. Rendering police assistance

90 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

13. In crime prevention function, the police-

A. enforces laws and ordinances
B. destroys the opportunity of the would be criminal to
commit crime
C. arrest the would be criminal before he commits crime
D. conduct patrol work

14. Pat Jessa, a newly PSBRC Graduate was deployed in the

Women’s Desk Division of the Manila Police District Headquarters
as assisting investigator even she has no specialized training
yet on women and children related cases. Pat Jessa is performing-
A. Operational function C. Support service function
B. Administrative function D. Assistance function

15. PSMS Bueno’s main task in the Pasay City Police Station is
to ensure that detention prisoners are secured and their needs
are attended to. What is the nature of PSMS Bueno’s function?
A. Primary C. Auxiliary
B. Line D. Secondary

16. Which of the following is NOT considered staff or

administrative function in the police organization?
A. Planning C. Personnel assignment
B. Records management D. Anti-gambling operation

17. When a group of individuals are united for some end or

work, arranged with a common purpose and objective in a
manner to enable the performance of related tasks by
individuals, and the establishment of areas of
responsibility with clear-cut channels of communication and
authority, they creates a/an –
A. organization C. line organization
B. delegation of authority D. functional organization

18. The organizational structure of the Philippine

National Police is –
A. functional C. line and staff
B. line D. matrix

19. Organization may be defined as the of arranging

personnel and functions in a systematic manner designed to
accommodate stated goals and objectives in the most ________
manner possible.
A. effective C. excellent
B. efficient D. economical

20. The question is often asked, do staff supervisors ever

exercise line authority? The most accurate answer to this
question is –
A. No, the staff officer is involved in assisting the line
supervisor and never has direct authority over them
B. Yes, the staff supervisor can exercise line authority but
only in emergency situations or when the reputation of
the department is at stake
C. No, a staff supervisor who exercised line authority would
cease to be a staff supervisor

91 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

D. Yes, when supervising members of the staff unit, the

staff supervisor exercises line authority

21. PEMS De Juan gives PCPL De Deos an order. For De Juan

to effectively hold De Deos responsible for properly
executing the order, De Juan must engage in some form of –
A. organization C. supervision
B. control D. planning

22. Of the various types of organizational structures, one

type places an expert in charge of a function regardless of
where in the agency that function is performed. What is this
type of organizational structure called?
A. Line organization C. Staff organization
B. Functional organization D. Line and Staff organization

23. Communication should usually follow the chain of

command. At times this principle may be violated. Which of
the following LEAST accurately describes when this principle
is allowed to be violated?
A. During emergency
B. When the reputation of the department is at stake
C. When a staff officer conducts inspection
D. When order is given to a police officer not under direct
supervision to save time

24. Span of control refers to the number of subordinates a

supervisor can effectively supervise. Generally, as one
ascends a police hierarchy, the span of control –
A. increases C. fluctuates unpredictably
B. decreases D. remains the same

25. A police organization is structured by dimensions just

as any other organization is structured. Which of the
following MOST accurately describes the dimensions of a
police organization?
A. Vertical and horizontal only
B. Horizontal and lateral only
C. Vertical and lateral only
D. Horizontal, vertical and lateral

26. Hierarchy of authority which is the order of ranks

from the highest to the lowest levels of the organization
is CALLED -
A. scalar Chain C. unity of command
B. line of authority D. chain of command

27. What organizational principle postulating that the

commander is directly responsible for any act or omission of
his subordinates in relation to the performance of their
official duty?
A. Command responsibility C. Unity of Command
B. Delegation of Authority D. span of Control

28. ______________ depicts the unbroken flow of command

from the top to the bottom of the organizational hierarchy.

92 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

A. Chain of command C. Unity of command

B. Span of control D. Hierarchy of authority

29. In ___________________________ lines of authority and

responsibility is made as definite and direct as possible so
that responsibility may properly fixed and duplication
avoided. Thus, every member in the force knows where he fits
in the pattern, to whom he is responsible and who is
responsible to him.
A. delineation of responsibility C. division of work
B. span of control D. chain of command

30. What are the best tools of controlling?

1. Inspection of records 3. Observation
2. Checking of statistics 4. Debriefing
A. 1 and 3 C. 1, 2 and 3
B. 2 and 4 D. 1, 2, 3 and 4

31. Chain of command is the line of authority,

responsibility and communication in any organization. It
should be strictly observed in the organization, otherwise -
A. span of control will be lost
B. command and control will break down
C. chain of command will be derailed
D. command responsibility will not be determined

32. It is-well established administrative principle that a

plan should be developed only when clear need for the plan
exists. Where in the typical police agency does this
recognition of need usually takes place?
A. Mainly at upper levels of the department
B. Only at the middle levels of the department
C. Mainly at the lower levels of the department
D. At any level of the department

33. As the size of an organization increases, some of the

administrative responsibilities are influenced. Which of the
following BEST describes what happens to the process of
coordination when an organization grows in size?
A. Coordination gets harder
B. Coordination remains about the same
C. Coordination gets easier
D. Coordination changes only if the overall of line units
increases number

34. PEMS Jurado frequently prefaces orders by saying,

“PCPT Hilado told me to tell you…..” This practice is bad
because –
A. The Captain might not have made the statement
B. It may appear to the police officers that the Master
Executive Sergeant is after the Captain’s job
C. The Police Officer s might believe that the Master
Executive Sergeant does not really support the order
D. It would be impossible for the Master Executive Sergeant
to conduct the follow up

93 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

35. Under the principle of unity of Command, each

individual, unit or situation must be under the immediate
________ of one person only.
A. supervision C. control
B. management D. watch

36. By ____________________ efforts of the different units

are coordinated and integrated so as to accomplish a
harmonious progress towards the primary objectives of the
office.
A. delegation of authority C. command responsibility
B. integration and coordination D. principle of hierarchy

37. When a group of individuals are united for some end or

work, arranged with a common purpose and objective in a manner
to enable the performance of related tasks by individuals, and
the establishment of areas of responsibility with clear-cut
channels of communication and authority, they creates a/an –
A. Organization C. Line organization
B. Delegation of authority D. Functional organization

38. The organizational structure of the Philippine National

Police is –
A. Functional C. Line and staff
B. Line D. Matrix

39. Hierarchy of authority which is the order of ranks from the

highest to the lowest levels of the organization CALLED –
A. Scalar Chain C. Unity of command
B. Line of authority D. Chain of command

40. What organizational principle postulating that the

commander is directly responsible for any act or omission of his
subordinates in relation to the performance of their official
duty?
A. Command responsibility C. Unity of Command
B. Delegation of Authority D. span of Control

41. ______________ depicts the unbroken flow of command from

the top to the bottom of the organizational hierarchy.
A. Chain of command C. Unity of command
B. Span of control D. Hierarchy of authority

42. In ___________________________ lines of authority and

responsibility is made as definite and direct as possible so that
responsibility may properly fixed and duplication avoided. Thus,
every member in the force knows where he fits in the pattern, to
whom he is responsible and who is responsible to him.
A. delineation of responsibility C. division of work
B. span of control D. chain of command

94 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

43. Earliest type of policing which was based on the principle

of self help is-
A. Tithing System C. Hue and City
B. Office of Constable D. Tun

44. In this system of policing in Europe, England was divided

into 55 military districts known as the Shire-Rieve. Shire was
the district, Rieve was the ruler who makes law, pass judgment
and impose punishment, with the assistance of the Constable.
A. Shire- Rieve System C. Leges Henri
B. The Travelling Judge D. The Magna-Carta

45. Which of the following Period that England’s police force

reach its milestone?
A. The Modern Policing Period (1829)
B. The Westminster Period (1285-1500)
C. The Norman Period (1066-1285)
D. The Anglo-Saxon Period (871-899

46. Which of the following is/are Sir Robert Peel’s concept of

modern police?
1. Organized along military lines who are screened and trained
2. Police personnel should be degree holders
3. Hired on a probationary basis and deployed by time and area
4. Accessible to the people and maintains records
A. 1, 2, 3 and 4 C. 1, 3 and 4
B. 1, 2 and 3 D. 2, 3 and4

47. The developmental period of policing which significantly

affects the contemporary policing system in the most countries in
the world is:
A. Anglo-Saxon Period C. Westminster Period
B. Norman Period D. Modern Period

48. The first undergraduate law enforcement course was

established at:
A. University of California C. Harvard University
B. San Jose State College D. City College of New York

49. A study which revealed that increased patrol did not reduce
crime and had no significant effect on crime volume.
A. Kansas City Preventive Patrol Experiment
B. New York City Patrol Experiment
C. Washington Patrol System Experiment
D. Crime Commission Research

50. He advocated high level of education for a police officer

which he thought would foster police professionalism. The
reforms he had introduced become the standard elements of
American police work and considered as the “Father of the Modern
Professional Police Force”.
A. August Vollmer C. Robert Peel
B. Orlando Wilson D. Henry Fielding

51. Police organized in each town during the Spanish Regime.

Its members are enlisted from the five percent of the able-
bodied male inhabitants of each province whose duties consist
of maintaining peace and order in the towns, patrolling, guarding
the tribunal and prison cells, and other odd duties in the town.
A. Carabineros de SeguridadPublica C. The Cuadrilleros

95 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

B. Cuerpo de SeguridadPublica D. The Guardia Civil

52. What are the best tools of controlling?

1. Inspection of records 3. Observation
2. Checking of statistics 4. Debriefing
A. 1 and 3 C. 1, 2 and 3
B. 2 and 4 D. 1, 2, 3 and 4

53. ___________________ include every procedures that will be

utilized and officially adopted as the standard methods of action
to be followed by all members of the department under specified
circumstances, regardless of the functional unit to which the
member may be confronted.
A. Policy or Procedural Plans C. Operational Plans
B. Tactical Plan D. Extra- Office Plans

54. Personnel and material organization, disbursement of funds such

as budget planning, accounting procedures, specification and
purchasing procedures, personnel and organization are covered by
what type of plans?
A. Management c. Budget
B. Administration d. Fiscal administration

55. Administrative control and operational supervision over the

PNP is exercise by the NAPOLCOM, which means; EXCEPT:
A. Development of policies and promulgation of police manual for
the PNP
B. Affirming, reversing or modifying personnel disciplinary
actions
C. Recommend the recall and reassignment of the Chief of Police
D. Exercise appellate jurisdiction over decisions on claims for
police benefits

56. The City or Municipal offices of the PNP is headed by-

A. Chief Inspector C. Chief of Police
B. Senior Inspector D. Commander or Chief

57. By virtue of RA 8551 the DILG was relieved of the primary

responsibility on matters involving the suppression of insurgency
and other serious threats to national security. In what instance
the PNP personnel may engage in combat operations against the
insurgents?
A. In times of national emergency
B. The President call on the PNP to support the AFP in combat
operation
C. There is no instance that the PNP engage in combat operations
against the insurgents except in self-defense
D. None of them

58. The National Appellate Board composed of a chairperson and

three regular members have the following appellate jurisdiction,
EXCEPT:
A. Demotion or dismissal cases decided by the RAB
B. Demotion or dismissal cases decided by the CPNP
C. Demotion or dismissal cases recommended by the IG-IAS that
were not acted upon by the CPNP
D. Affirmation of the IG-IAS to the resolution of the RIAS
dismissing the complaint for lack of probable cause

96 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

59. It was established to keep a healthy relationship between

the PNP and the Muslim community. It oversee police matters
concerning Muslim communities, including the handling of issues
such as alleged harassment and discrimination against Muslim
Filipinos.
A. Zakat C. Maktab al-Khidamat
B. Hawala D. Salaam Police Center

60. Patrolman Diony Ventura is frequently abandoning his post,

disobey lawful orders of his superior officer, and always late
during the pre-patrol formation. He was even caught playing cara
y cruz while under the influence of liquor. The following
authorities can sanction him, EXCEPT:
A. Chief of Police or Provincial Director
B. Regional Director
C. Peoples Law Enforcement Board
D. Chief, PNP

61. Which of the following is NOT a program of the NAPOLCOM and

PNP in relation to Women and Children’s Desk?
1. Every police office throughout the country should have, at
least 10% of its personnel women
2. Every police station throughout the country shall have Women’s
Desk; and in the annual recruitment and selection of
applicants for police service at least 10% out of the total
number of quota shall be allocated and filled in by women
applicants
3. The recruited policewomen should be assigned to city or
municipal police stations to assume the task in the Women and
Children’s Desk
4. The recruited policewomen shall be required to undergo a
specialized course in handling cases involving women and
children
A. 1, 2, 3 and 4 C. 3 and 4
B. 2, 3 and 4 D. 4

62. Power exercised by the Local Government Executives over

the PNP personnel assigned in their area of jurisdiction, which
is considered not a disciplinary action, EXCEPT:
A. Reassignment C. Relief
B. Transfer D. Admonition

63. Chain of command is the line of authority, responsibility

and communication in any organization. It should be strictly
observed in the organization. Failure to do so will –
A. span of control
B. breaking down command and control
C. loses chain of command
D. losing command responsibility

64. Police Officer who is demoted or dismissed from the service

may appeal his case in any of the following, as the case may be.
1. Regional Appellate Board and National Appellate Board
2. Secretary of the Interior and Local Government
3. Civil Service Commission
4. Chief PNP
A. 1, 2, 3 and 4 C. 1 and 3
B. 1, 2 and 3 D. 2 and 4

97 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

65. Who among the following has NO power to summarily

dismissed a uniformed PNP personnel?
A. National Police Commission
B. PNP Chief
C. PNP Regional Directors
D. Chief of the PNP Task Forces

66. A police officer who was demoted or dismissed from the

service may appeal his case to the National Appellate Board and
the Regional Appellate Board as the case maybe. To whom he may
appeal in case the said appellate authorities affirmed the
decisions?
A. Chief, Philippine National Police
B. Secretary of Interior and Local Government
C. Department of Interior and Local Government
D. National Police Commission en banc

67. Which type of leadership that the supervisor is more or

less an information booth who plays down his role in the group’s
activities and on hand mainly to provide materials and
information, together with minimum control?
A. Autocratic C. Free-Rein
B. Democratic D. Liberal

68. Police organizational hierarchy is composed various levels

such as national, regional, provincial and city or municipal.
City or Municipal Police Offices is headed by –
A. Chief Inspector C. Chief of Police
B. Senior Inspector D. Commander or Chief

69. The Regional

Appell’ate Board is empowered to review decisions of the Regional
Director, other officials, Mayors, and PLEB. It is composed of;
EXCEPT:
A. Senior officer of the NAPOLCOM Regional Office
B. PNP representative
C. RPOC representative
D. LGU representative

70. ____________ ensures that events, activities and

direction conform to the police plans.
A. Controlling C. leading
B. Directing D. staffing

71. Planning, controlling and _______ are the three

fundamental process of police administration.
A. Trafficking C. investigating
B. Supervising D. directing

72. Organizing in police planning in the setting up

of________ steps in doing or accomplishing things.
A. Alternative C. specific
B. Generalized D. broad

98 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

73. Which of the following does NOT refer to planning?

A. Deciding in advance what to do, how to do, and who is to
do it.
B. It is the process of developing a method or procedure of
an arrangement of parts intended to facilitate the
attainment of the defined objectives.
C. It is the intellectual process, conscious determination
of courses of action, basing of decisions on purpose,
facts and considered estimate
D. It is the interpersonal aspect of managing by which
subordinates are led to understand and contribute
effectively and efficiently to the attainment of
objectives.

74. To improve the output of operations, you as a police

officer developing a plan, should consider the end_______ by
top management.
A. unwanted C. not called for
B. desired D. negated

75. One of the preliminary steps to police_________ is the

recognition of the need of the plan.
A. planning C. assuring
B. investigation D. Maneuver

76. In police operational planning, the use of the wedge,

squad diagonal or deployed line, would be most likely for -
A. Coup de etat C. employees walk-out
B. Disaster and relief operation D. Civil Disturbance

77. Broad planning is the responsibility of whom?

A. District Director C. Chief, PNP
B. Administrative Officer D. Directorial Staff

78. A compilation of what is to be done and how to do it

in many administrative and even operational activities is
called “SOP” this SOP means –
A. Stand by Operating Procedure
B. Standard Operating Procedures
C. Standard operational Procedure
D. Standard Operations Procedures

79. The three (3) criteria used to test the solution of a

plan, whether for the police or military are feasibility,
acceptability and –
A. suitability C. possibility
B. solvability D. adaptability

80. Operational plans are –

A. police plans relating to patrol distribution, crime
investigation, traffic and vice control
B. police plans related to the operation of special units
like Special Action Force
C. police plans related to procurement of supplies

99 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

D. police plans related to training, assignment and

placement of police personnel

81. A police plan development shows problem-solving

procedures, a type of staff duty and problem analysis and
solution options.
A. True C. False
B. In some cases D. Sometimes

82. A police plan is __________ if it can accomplish the

purpose.
A. practicable C. suitable
B. usable D. feasible

83. Chief of police prepares that document to indicate the

funding requirements necessary for the administration and
operation of his police station is known as –
A. work program C. budget
B. expenditure plan D. program review and Analysis

84. Recognition of the need to plan and the formulation of

plan objectives are the first two steps in the planning
process. Which of the following does NOT form part of the
remaining three (3) basic steps in planning?
A. Gathering and analysis of data
B. Development of details of the plan
C. Obtaining concurrences from organizational units which
may be affected by the proposed plan.
D. Generation of alternatives and options

85. A plan that is restricted to methods of action to be

taken at the designated location and under specific
situation is CALLED –
A. procedural C. operational
B. tactical D. management

86. You are appointed Chief of Police in one of the

municipality. You have ten (10) policemen and two (2)
officers only. Which of the following alternatives shall you
choose so that the planning function can be effectively
undertaken?
A. You, the COP will be the planning officer
B. You will delegate the planning functions to one of the
two officers
C. You will form a planning section composed of one officer
and two policemen
D. You will make day to day decisions based on the daily
development and will not make any plan.

87. PLT Juan Dela Cruz is assigned to prepare and anti-

drug abuse plan for his police station. He started
collecting data on the extent of drug problems by going over
the reports, documents, news reports, books, periodicals, as
well as previous researches on drug problem in his

100 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

municipality. Aside from these data collection efforts, what

can Dela Cruz can do?
A. Conduct surveys using questionnaires or interview guide
B. Be contented with all data he gathered
C. Start analyzing his collected data
D. Submit his data to the chief of Police

88. During the preparation of police operation plan, and

the planners perceive that he lacks certain data, which are
not readily available or cannot be obtained to finish his
plan, he would use this to complete the work.
A. Assumptions C. Bertillion Theory
B. Mathematical Computations D. Interview Results

89. These are effective approaches for promotion

confidence, loyalty and interest on the part of all the
members of the police organization. What are they?
A. Conferences and dialogues c. Bull out
B. Punishment d. Reprimand

90. When the police plan can accomplish the purpose of its
goal then the plan is –
A. feasible C. acceptable
B. suitable D. excellent

91. Planning is essential in every police organizations

because:
1. It identifies activities the determines tasks of
everyone
2. It combines all aspects of police works for efficient
and effective performance
3. It utilizes the easiest method in crime prevention
A. 1 and 3 C. 1 and 2
B. 2 and 3 D. 1, 2 and 3

92. Tactics and strategies are similar in the sense that

they:
1. both concern police works
2. deal on how police work can best be accomplished
3. both concerns with the accomplishment of the assigned
tasks
4. define the technique to accomplish the objective
A. 1 and 2 C. 1, 3 and 4
B. 3 and 4 D. 1, 2 and 4

93. Planning and programming are different in the sense

that –
A. Planning is a broad concept while programming is not
B. Plan denotes what to be done while programming listed the
things to be done, when it will be done and who will do
it
C. Planning is a part of police operation while programming
is part of planning

101 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

D. There is no planning if there is no programming

94. It determines the routines of police activities. What

is it?
A. Policy or procedural plan
B. Extra Departmental Plan
C. Tactical Plan
D. Management plan

95. To accomplish the purpose of patrol, crime prevention,

traffic, vice, etc, these can be found in –
A. management plan C. operational plan
B. tactical D. extra departmental plan

96. The responsibility for planning in a police station

lies with –
A. The Chief of Police C. Delegated Staff Officer
B. Deputy Duly Authorized D. Chief of Planning Bureau

97. Three criteria used to test the solution of a plan,

whether for the police or military are feasibility,
suitability and –
A. currency C. acceptability
B. solvability D. adaptability

98. Planning as management function is done by various

levels of PNP organization. Broad internal planning is done
by the –
A. Chief, PNP C. DILG Secretary
B. Director, Directorate for Plans D. NAPOLCOM

99. As a registered criminologist, looking at the steps of

the police plan development will reveal that it is a –
A. problem-solving procedure
B. problem analysis and solution option
C. type of staff duty
D. line function

100. Day to day or year-around activities of a police is a

part of –
A. tactical plan C. extra departmental plan
B. operational plan D. management plan

POST-TEST ON POLICE PERSONNEL AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Instruction: Select the correct answer for each of the following questions. Mark only
one answer for each item by shading the box corresponding to the letter of your choice
on the answer sheet provided. STRICTLY NO ERASURES ALLOWED. Use pencil no.2
only.

102 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

21. In what aspects of police work does the recruits shall have to undergo before
obtaining permanent appointment to the PNP?
A. Investigation, intelligence and traffic
B. Patrol, traffic and investigation
C. Patrol and investigation
D. Field and staff works

22. A PNP personnel with the rank of Superintendent is subject to the appointing power
of the ___________________ to the next higher rank.
A. President
B. DILG Secretary
C. President subject to the confirmation of the Commission on Appointments
D. President upon the recommendation of the National Peace and Order Council

23. In what special institution of learning the PNP, BJMP and BFP undergo training,
human resource development and continuing education?
A. Philippine National Police Academy
B. National Police College
C. Philippine National Training Center
D. Philippine Public Safety College

27. Who grants age, height and weight waivers for police applicants who do not meet
the basic qualifications?
A. NAPOLCOM en banc C. PNP Chief
B. NAPOLCOM Regional Director D. DILG secretary

28. NAPOLCOM’s policies on recruitment, selection, and appointment of POI applicants,

except:
1. Ensure the entry of highly qualified individuals into the police service
2. Appointment of applicants who possess basic qualifications but prepared
himself to become police officers
3. Strengthen PNP human resource capability
4. Give extra premium to applicants’ intellectual, mental, emotional and
psychological fitness and preparedness for police service
A. 1, 2 and 3 C. 1 and 4
B. 1, 3 and 4 D. 1
29. Which of the following is the correct sequence in the selection and appointment of
Patrolman/Patrolwoman applicants?
1. Final committee interview
2. Complete character and background investigation
3. Complete physical, medical and dental examination
4. Psychiatric/psychological examination
5. Physical agility test
6. Preliminary interview
A. 3, 5, 2, 1, 5 and 6 C. 6, 4, 2, 3, 5 and 1
B. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 2 D. 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1
30. A newly appointed Patrolman will receive his permanent appointment
________________________.
A. After having passed all of the selection process
B. After taking an oath as police officer
C. After the completion of his Public Safety Basic Recruit Course and passing
qualifying examination for permanency
D. After completion of the Public Safety Basic Recruit Course and Field Training
Program

31. Under Republic Act No. 9708, pending administrative and/or criminal case against
police officer is not a bar for promotion, provided the following rule/s shall be observed.
1. The police officer is ineligible for promotion during the pendency of criminal
case if such criminal case involves but not limited to violation of human rights punishable
by reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment and the court has determined that the
evidence of his guilt is strong

103 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

2. After finding of probable cause which means the information has already been
filed and docketed in court, the case remains unresolved for two (2) years, the
concerned police officer shall be considered for promotion
3. In the event that the police officer is held guilty for the crime by final judgment,
promotion shall be recalled
4. Whenever the concerned police offier is acquitted for an offense, unpaid
salaries and benefits during suspension or dismissal shall be paid
A. 1, 2 and 3 C. 1 and 3
B. 1, 2, 3 and 4 D. 2 and 4

32. PMSg Jake De Dios was administratively charged before the Internal Affairs Service;
found culpable and punished with suspension. Decision however was rendered upon his
retirement. What is the effect of the penalty of suspension to his retirement benefits?
A. His retirement benefits will be forfeited
B. His retirement benefits will not be paid
C. Corresponding amount relative to the period of suspension shall be deducted
from the portion of his retirement benefits
D. Twenty five percent of his retirement benefits will be forfeited and placed into
the trust fund for the victims of PNP personnel abuses

33. PCpl Pedro Slarza was charged with frustrated homicide before the RTC of Manila.
On a petition of the plaintiff, he was preventively suspended for 90 days. After the trial of
the case he was acquitted on the ground of self-defense and performance of official
duty. What is the effect of such acquittal to his unpaid salary during the period of
suspension?
A. It will be forfeited
B. It will be paid promptly
C. It will be reduced of 10%
D. It will not be paid because he did not actually rendered service

37. Permanent disability of the Police Commissioned Officers and Police Non-
Commissioned Officers is compensable provided that the following requisites are
present:
1. Finding and certification by the appropriate medical officer that the extent of
the disability and sickness renders them unfit or unable to perform duties of the position
2. Duly recommended by the Regional Director or Chief PNP
3. Injuries suffered or sickness contracted resulting to permanent disability is due
to the performance of official duties
4. Certification by the NAPOLCOM
A. 1, 2 and 3 C. 1 and 2
B. 1, 3 and 4 D. 3 and
38. Assignment is a process of designating personnel in a particular function, duty or
responsibility. Its purpose is:
A. To ensure systematic and effective utilization of all members of the
organization.
B. To place right person on the right job
C. To establish accountability
D. To make sure that all works will be done, and done according to plans

39. Which of the following is a part of the Philippine National Police uniformed
prsonnel’s basic pay or salary?
A. Longevity pay C. Clothing allowance
B. Hazardous pay D. Quarter allowance

40. Personnel management as a management function is delegated to a department or

a unit in the organization called personnel department which performs_____________.
A. Staff function C. Operational function
B. Line function D. Support service function

104 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

41. Personnel policies may be communicated among employees in any of the following
means.
1. Handbooks 4. Circulars
2. Policy Manual 5. Bulletin Boards
3. Numbered Memoranda 6. Meetings and conferences
A. 1, 3 and 5 C. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
B. 2, 4 and 6 D. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6

43. Personnel policies and guidelines issued by NAPOLCOM in relation to recruitment,

selection and appointment of a police officer.
1. Ensure the entry of highly qualified individuals into the police service and to
strengthen the human resource capability of the PNP
2. Give extra premium to applicants’ intellectual, mental, emotional, and
psychological fitness and preparedness for police service
3. Ensure that merit and fitness shall be strictly implemented no matter whom will
be affected
4. Give preference to graduates of criminology and registered criminologists
A. 1 and 2 C. 1 and 3
B. 3 and 4 D. 2 and 4

44. The “Salary Grade” of a Police Officer 1 is__________ which is equivalent to

public school teacher.
A. 30 C. P18,000.00
B. 10 D. P 14,000.00

45. Philippine National Police uniformed personnel, who have served at least one (1)
year of active service in the permanent grade, for purposes of retirement pay, be retired
in__________________________.
A. One rank higher than the permanent rank has last held
B. One grade higher than the permanent grade has last held
C. Two ranks higher than the rank last held
D. One grade higher regardless of the status of the last grade held

46. Philippine National Police “Medal of Valor” is granted by ___________________.

A. The NAPOLCOM en banc C. The President of the Philippines
B. The DILG Secretary D. The Chief, PNP

47. Pat Noel Salvadico was appointed in the PNP on February 2014. If the time-grade
pursuant to NAPOLCOM Resolution No. 2013-501 would be applied to him, assuming
that he would be promoted regularly, he would be a Police Inspector for how many years
in the police service?
A. 15 years C. 20 years
B. 12 years D. 16 years

48. Police Commissioned Officers who are mandated to perform essential and purely
police functions, i.e. law enforcement, crime prevention and investigation, intelligence,
internal security operations, and relative administrative work.
A. Line Officers C. Command Line Officers
B. Technical Services Officers D. Staff Line Officers

105 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

POST- TEST ON POLICE PATROL AND COMPARATIVE POLICE SYSTEM

Direction: Choose the letter of the correct answer.

1. Done by R-44 “Raven” Aircraft whose mission is to conduct aerial

anti-crime and surveillance patrols in Metro Manila and nearby regions
in support of ground operations.

A. PNP sky police C. Helicopter patrol

B. Sky patrol D. High visibility patrol

2. While conducting spot check on suspicious person, you a Police

officer on the beat are required at all times to –

A. remain vigilant, maintain caution and observe courtesy

B. remember the Miranda Warning and recite it to the suspect
C. expect the unexpected
D. be ready for possible confrontation

3. Which of the following is NOT required when you, a Criminologist-

Police Officer accost a suspicious person?

A. Observe courtesy at all times

B. Announce your identity as police officer
C. Inform the person of his rights under the law
D. Hold a person within the period reasonably necessary and limit
the question to the person’s identity, place of residence and
other personal circumstances

106 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

4. Based on the area of coverage which patrol method can be used in

beat?

A. Motorcycle patrol C. Decoy patrol

B. Plainclothes patrol D. Foot patrol

5. Patrol shifts divide the 24-hour period into three 8-hour shift.
Which is called the dog shift?

A. 3:00 AM to 11:00 AM C. All of the shifts

B. 11:00 PM to 7:00 AM D. 7:00 AM to 3:00 Am

6. A phenomenon by which regional economies, societies, culture,

information, ideas and authority are integrated by global network
through communication transportation and trade is termed___.

A. globalization C. transnational ideas

B. territorial crossing D. international cooperation

7. First used by the Egyptians for patrolling. It is useful in high

crime areas, dangerous search situations, dealing with street gangs,
dispersing crowd, apprehending fleeing suspects, parks, schools and
other large building.

A. Dog patrol C. K-9 Police Operations

B. Canine Assisted Patrol D. K-9 Corps

8. Most frequently used and high scoring dog for police work is___.

A. Bouviers C. Labrador

B. German Shepherd D. Pitbul

9. Before the dispatch of patrol teams, the patrol supervisors, as

standard operating procedure, conduct briefing by disseminating the
following, EXCEPT –

A. any orders, directives or instructions from higher authorities

B. any orders, directives or instructions from the chief of
police
C. new policies or guidelines being implemented by the police
organization

107 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

D. news, information and other reports or matters of public

concern

10. In France, The National Police is under the Minister of Interior,

while the National Gendarmerie is under the___.

A. Minister of Justice C. Inspector General

B. Minister of Defense D. Director of the Gendarmarie

11. Which of the following is NOT a territorial unit in patrol?

A. Route C. Sector

B. Beat D. Jurisdiction

12. The Myanmar Police Force which is under the Burmese military is in
the command of Director General with the rank of___.

A. Police General C. Director

B. Commissioner of the Police D. Police Major General

13. Which patrol method is restricted to small areas and used to deal
with special problems of prevention and repression that cannot be
handled by the officers in radio cars?

A. Foot patrol C. Motorcycle patrol

B. Motorcycle patrol D. Low visibility patrol

14. First used by the Egyptians for patrolling. It is useful in high

crime areas, dangerous search situations, dealing with street gangs,
dispersing crowd, apprehending fleeing suspects, parks, schools and
other large building.

A. Dog patrol C. K-9 Police Operations

B. Canine Assisted Patrol D. K-9 Corps

15. Cambodian National Police’ entrance and retirement age is__.

A. 21-30 and 56 C. 18-28 and 50

B. 23-36 and 65 D. 21-30 and 65

16. Common uses of horse patrol, EXCEPT –

108 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

A. park C. commercial Center

B. beach D. parade and crowd patrol

17. The Interpol headquarters was initially located in___.

A. Vienna Austria C. London England

B. New York City USA D. Lyon France

18. This patrol method will enable the patrol officer to closely
observe persons and things in his beat and would maintain better
personal contact with citizens and develop police community relations.
Which of these?

A. Bicycle Patrol C. Canine (K-9) Assisted Patrol

B. Motorcycle Patrol D. Foot Patrol

19. The most extensively used and effective means of transportation for
police patrol. It covers wider area, provide constant availability to
public calls and provides an element of surprise, especially when a
crime is in progress. This refers to –

A. motorcycle patrol C. plainclothes patrol

B. automobile patrol D. helicopter patrol

20. The Royal Thai Police is a_________, adopted a militaristic style

but service oriented police organization, which is headed by the
Director General who is answerable to the Prime Minister.

A. centralized police system C. decentralized police pattern

B. civilian police organization D. service oriented police

organization

21. It is based on the premise that the “aura of police omnipresence”

in the community can reduce certain types of crimes.

A. High visibility patrol C. proactive patrol

B. Low visibility patrol D. Reactive patrol

22. A common police patrol practice particularly in high-crime areas –

persons whose behaviour is suspicious are accosted on the street,
interrogated and frisked.

109 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

A. High visibility patrol C. Stop and frisk

B. Reactive patrol D. Street

interview/interrogation

23. If the PNP of the Philippines has Police Officer 1, Singapore

Police Force has________.

A. constable C. private

B. policeman D. inspector

24. Philippine National Police is in the Philippines; _______ is in

Australia.

A. National Police of Australia C. Australian Federal Police

B. Australian National Police D. Federal Police of

Australia

25. It is restricted to small areas and used to deal with special

problems of prevention and repression that cannot be handled by the
officers in radio cars.

A. Foot patrol C. Motorcycle patrol

B. Motorcycle patrol D. Low visibility patrol

26. What is the highest rank in the Australian Federal Police?

A. Commissioner C. Commander

B. Superintendent D. Constable

27. When conducting spot inquiry or asking questions to person, to

obtain information, you, as police officers should___.

A. be tactful and persuasive

B. exhibit cunning
C. adopt proven interview and interrogation techniques
D. be discreet, business-like and avoid unnecessary body language

28. You and your buddy- beat patroller are accosting a suspicious
looking person. For identification purposes, you should___

A. demand form the suspicious person to present his wallet or bag

and take the cards or documents therein

110 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

B. personally take the cards or documents from suspicious

person’s wallet or bag
C. let the suspicious person’s get his cards or documents from
his wallet or bag and hand them over to you
D. take the wallet or bag where the suspicious person’s card or
document are placed after obtaining his consent

29. You are a police officer who are conducting a search during a
nighttime. Using a flashlight to aid your vision, tactical
considerations and common sense dictate that you should hold the
flashlight___.

A. low to confuse possible threats of their target

B. tightly away from your body to avoid being an easy target
C. high to ensure wider beam coverage making it easy to expose
the threats
D. close to your body to ensure a firmer grip and aoid the risk
of dropping it in case of shootout

30. The highest rank in the PNP is Director General (DG) and lowest is
Police Officer I (PO1), in Royal Malaysian Police (RMP) –

A. Inspector General of Police (IGP) and Constable (PC)

B. Police General and Private

C. Police General and Policeman/Constable

D. None of them

31. This patrol strategy is effective for saturation coverage in high

crime areas. Which of these?

A. Plainclothes patrol C. Canine (K-9) assisted patrol

B. Decoy patrol D. Check point

32. When you, a patrol officer works alongside with your colleague
during patrol operations, it is PRIMARILY in line with _____.

1. The directive to familiarize with your comrade

2. An existing policy to strictly observe the “Buddy System”
3. Existing guidelines to ensure transparency in your personal
and official functions
4. The Unit directive to closely monitor and supervise personnel
on the ground
5. The necessity to increase your survival advantage when faced
with a high-risk situation
A. 1 and 4 C. 2 and 5
B. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 D. 1, 3 and 5

33. What is the official name of the Indonesian Police?

A. POLRI C. RTP

111 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

B. Ministry of Public Safety D. KNP

34. What is the lowest rank in the Korean National Police?

A. Police officer C. Private

B. Rank-and-File Officer D. Assistant Inspector

35. Which of the following are the three (3) aspects of police
visibility?

A. Proper, adequate and timely police response

B. Physical presence of the police, proper patrolling scheme and

response time

C. Mobile, integrated and widespread

D. foot patrol, mobile patrol and specialized patrol scheme.

36. Director General is to the PNP; Police General is to the____

A. Singapore Police Force C. Royal Thai Police

B. Korean National Police D. National Police Agency

37. The UN Security Council is composed of how many permanent members?

A. 15 C. 10

B. 5 D. 3

38. This type of patrol will enable the patrol officer to closely
observe persons and things in his beat and would maintain better
personal contact with citizens and develop police community relations.

A. Bicycle Patrol C. Canine (K-9) Assisted

Patrol

B. Motorcycle Patrol D. Foot Patrol

39. The International Court of Justice has how many elective members
for a term of 9 years?

A. 15 C. 9

B. 10 D. 11

40. While in automobile patrol, police officer should do the following:

No.1 Do not get out of the car. Just observe the surrounding

112 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

particularly persons, things, situations and conditions; No.2 Whatever

patrol pattern is used, do it in regular and predictable manner.

A. Statement No. 1 is correct while statement No. 2 is wrong

B. Statement No. 1 is wrong while statement no. 2 is correct

C. Statements No. 1 and 2 are both correct

D. Statements No. 1 and 2 are both wrong

41. It hightens the effect of high visibility patrol. It is done by

stopping persons on the street whose behavior is suspicious, detaining
them briefly for questioning, and frisking them for concealed weapons.
Which of these?

A. Stop and Frisk C. Decoy Patrol

B. Street Interview/Interrogation D. Plainclothes Patrol

42. Royal Lao Police is under the ______.

A. Ministry of Public Security C. Ministry of Interior

B. Ministry of Defense D. The King of Laos

43. Assume that you are a Criminologist-Beat Patroller. Before you

assume your tour of duty, you are required, as a standard practice
to____.

A. attend the roll call formation for briefing

B. check your personal appearance, uniform and individual
equipment and instruments
C. report to your immediate superior officer and declare
readiness for the task
D. know the crime incidents that transpired during the previous
day

44. What is the gauge of an efficient patrol Officer?

A. Punctual reporting to his beat

B. Constant alert patrolling with a keen observation of persons and
things
C. Attending to people's problems
D. Efficient and effective prevention of crime

45. Philippine National Police age qualification for initial entry is

21-30; Royal Malaysian Police’s initial entry is______.

A. 18-28 C. 14-18

B. 21-35 D. 21-25

113 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

46. What is the highest and lowest rank in Cambodian National Police?

A. Major General

B. Major General and Staff Sergeant

C. Commissioner and Sergeant

D. General and Staff Sergeant

47. Cambodian National Police is under what agency in Cambodia?

A. Ministry of Interior or Internal Affairs

B. Ministry of Police Matters

C. Ministry of Defense

D. Department of Interior

48. Which of the following is the objective of high visibility patrol?

A. Reduction of certain type of crime by increasing the aura of

police omnipresence
B. Increase apprehension of criminals engaged in selected street
crimes
C. Deterrence of criminal activity as a result of greater
probability of apprehension
D. Promote feeling of security among citizen

49. The English Constable is acting as a servant of the crown and not
as an employee of the provincial police authority that paid him; while
American police Officers are –

A. acting as servant of the president

B. legally accountable to the governor

C. acting as servant of higher authority

D. legally accountable for the performance of their duties to the

municipality that they serve

50. Their recruits start their careers at the rank of constable, and
since its inception in 1829 have not carried guns which is one of the
unique and often discussed features of its policing. Which is being
referred?

A. English Policing C. Sweden Policing

B. French Policing D. German Policing

114 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

51. Which of the following is NOT one of the types of police models in
the world?

A. Fragmented police System

B. Continental Police System

C. Combined Police System

D. National Centralized Police System

52. The patrol method that has the combined characteristics of mobility
and stealth refers to –

A. foot patrol C. motorcycle patrol

B. bicycle patrol D. automobile patrol

53. The National Police of France is headed by the –

A. Director General C. Chief of Police

B. Commission of Police D. Police General

54. The Philippine Center on Transnational Crimes (PCTC) is under the

Office of the President but placed under the general supervision and
control of what?

A. Department of National Defense (DND)

B. Department of Interior and Local Government (DILG)
C. Department of Foreign Affairs (DFA)
D. National Security Adviser (NSA)

55. “During his tour of duty, a patrol officer is required to observe

and monitor public gatherings, prevent disorders and disperse unlawful
assemblies.” From the preceding statement, which of them is NOT one of
the functions that a patrol officer performs?

A. Crime control functions C. Investigation functions

B. Intelligence functions D. Police-community relations
functions

56. Its key is the proper enforcement of the provisions of the criminal
law and other laws governing criminal acts.

A. Crime prevention C. Regulations of non-criminal

conduct

B. Crime control D. Order maintenance

57. Swedish Police is a national police force which is under______.

115 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

A. Ministry of Defense C. National Police Board

B. Ministry of Justice D. National Police Commissioner

58. Crimes that take place across national borders are CALLED –

A. international crimes C. national crimes

B. transnational crimes D. borderless crimes

59. While acting as desk officer of the day, you received a telephone
call from a concerned citizen saying that a street brawl between two
rival gangs was going on in front of a popular bar joint. The FIRST
thing that you should do in this situation is to –

A. inform the station’s roving patrol to proceed to the area to

pacify the warring groups
B. ask the name of the caller and note down all available data as
to the nature of the call
C. tell the caller that police officers were already dispatched
and on their way to the area
D. inform your immediate superior officer so he can dispatched a
response team to the area

60. Which office/ agency that has the actual control of the police in
Japan which enjoys degree of local autonomy?

A. Prime Minister

B. National Police Agency

C. National Public Safety Commission

D. Regional Police Bureaus

61. Patrol is the only form of police service which directly attempts
to eliminate the desire and opportunity of an individual to commit
misconduct, therefore patrol is-

A. backbone of police organization

B. operational heart of the police organization

C. essence of police function

D. nerve center of police organization

62. Known as 1-24-7 is ___.

A. INTERPOL Red Notice Project

116 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

B. INTERPOL Global Communication System

C. 1-24-7 Expansion Program

D. inter-Agency Coordination

63. In each prefecture in Tokyo Japan there are several police stations
that serve as the principal operational unit of the police which is
sub-divided into police boxes which are popularly known as –

A. Koban C. Chuzaishe

B. Chi sai san D. Oyabun

64. While off-duty and in civilian clothes, PSMS Jeric Melencio was
informed by a passerby that a street fight between two rivals
fraternities armed with bladed weapons was going in front of a fast
food chain nearby. Wasting no time, he immediately proceeded to the
scene and provided the necessary police intervention by single-handedly
trying to break up the fight using his badge and authority as a police
Officer. Is the action of Melencio in single-handedly intervening
during a street brawl desirable?

A. Yes, because the situation called for an immediate police

response
B. No, because he unnecessarily exposed himself to danger owing
to a superior number of hostile individuals in such a
situation
C. Yes, because inaction on his part could further lead to
injuries and even loss of lives
D. No, because he lacks the necessary capability to pacify the
warring groups, aggravated by the fact that he was already
off-duty

65. Riot police in Japan whose criteria for selection is their physical
strength, command of the martial arts and ability to cope in stressful
situation is CALLED-

A. Bushido C. Samurai

B. Shinobi D. Kidotai

66. A uniformed patrol officer’s work is generally judged by –

A. his ability to keep his beat from crimes and minor offenses

B. when all of the residents are happy of him

C. his knowledge of all problems in the community

D. his ability to solve crimes occurred in his beat

117 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

68. While on foot patrol, you, a Criminologist-Police Officer responded

to a concerned citizen’s call for police assistance due to planted or
found explosives at a department store located in front of a gasoline
station. In this situation, your most immediate course of action
is/are, EXCEPT one.

A. Promptly lead onlookers to a safe distance

B. Immediately attempt to handle, move or lift the object to a
safe place to avoid possible casualties
C. Contact the tactical operations center and request for
Explosive Ordnance Disposal Team
D. Warn the people inside the department store about the presence
of a bomb which could explode anytime

69. Considered as the major concerns of the Philippine Center on

Transnational Crimes (PCTC).

1. Information exchange

2. Law enforcement coordination

3. Strategic studies and capacity building

A. 1 and 3 C. 1, 2 and 3

B. 2 and 3 D. Only 2

70. While patrolling your assigned beat along EDSA, Pasay, your
attention was called by a motorist who was apparently lost or could not
find the right way to his destination. He then asked you for
directions. In this situation, what is the best action for you to take?

A. Politely tell the motorist that it is not your duty to assist

him in such a situation
B. Help him find his way but tactfully remind him to bring a
street map the next time around
C. Immediately assist him by providing information as to proper
directions and street locations
D. Ignore his call for assistance as it is not an emergency in
nature and you have other pressing matters to accomplish

71. An international Police Organization that facilitates cross-border

police cooperation and support to prevent and combat international
crime

A. Philippine Center on Transnational Crime (PCTC)

B. International Criminal Police Organization (INTERPOL )
C. International Association of the Chief of Police (IACP)
D. ASEAN National Police

118 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

72. Notice issued by the Interpol when a certain fugitive has a

pending warrant from his mother State and the latter seeks to arrest
him and be extradited is –

A. Blue Notice C. Red Notice

B. Black Notice D. Green Notice

73. While on board a mobile car in a routine patrol you reached an

intersection with the red traffic light on. Instead of coming to a full
stop you went on full speed to the consternation of drivers following
you and those in the opposite direction.

A. Your action is desirable because as police officer you are

exempted from observing traffic rules while on patrol duties
B. Your action is correct because your duty of protecting life and
property is more important than observing traffic rules
C. Your action is undesirable because unlimited accessibility to
all roads is not an excuse to obey traffic rules although you
are not bound to observe it all the time
D. Your action is undesirable because it might cause traffic
accident and courts public disdain to the police as law
violators instead of law enforcers

74. A uniformed patrol officer’s work is generally judged by –

A. his ability to keep his beat from crimes and minor offenses

B. when all of the residents are happy of him

C. his knowledge of all problems in the community

D. his ability to solve crimes occurred in his beat

75. What are the three (3) elements that must be present at the same
time and place before a crime to happen?

A. Motive, instrumentality and opportunity

B. Opportunity, convenience and instrumentality

C. Desire planning and execution

D. Desire, opportunity and convenience

76. Which of the following are the three (3) aspects of police
visibility?

A. Proper, adequate and timely police response

B. Physical presence of the police, proper patrolling scheme and

response time

C. Mobile, integrated and widespread

119 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

D. foot patrol, mobile patrol and specialized patrol scheme

77. Patrol deployment is consists of three stages. What is the first

stage in deploying patrol officers for duty?

A. Briefing C. Deployment

B. Pre-deployment D. Post-deployment

78 Supervision by unit leaders of the patrol elements in both pre-

patrol and post-patrol stage is important to –

A. ensure compliance to policies

B. ensure that patrol officers are in proper uniform

C. check their firearms and police paraphernalia

D. check attendance of police officer, orientation and return of

equipment issued

79. You are a patrol officer assign in a beat. What report will you
prepare upon reaching the end of your line beat, and before returning
to previous location?

A. Blotter C. Investigation report

B. Situation report D. incident report

80. What should be done in order to ensure that patrol officers are on
their beats?

A. Implement an effective patrol supervision

B. Grant greater police authority

C. Double the number of patrol officers

D. Require the submission of after-duty report

81. The feeling of a would-be criminals that policemen are everywhere

is known as –

A. police presence C. police omnipotent

B. police visibility D. psychology of omnipresence

82. Different needs call for different approaches to patrol. However,

among experts in the field, it is generally agreed that the most
expensive method of patrol is –

120 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

A. radio motor patrol C. horse patrol

B. foot patrol D. helicopter patrol

83. Proper distribution of patrol officers is in obvious task of any

police department. In performing this task, determining which of the
following should be done first?

A. How many police officers are available for assignment?

B. What areas of the city have the greatest need for police
service?

C. During what periods of time does the greatest need for police
service exist?

D. How many supervisors are available for assignment?

84. The police are constantly striving to find new and better ways to
patrol. Lately, police departments have used the concept of directed
patrol more and more. This kind of patrol directs a police officer to
patrol –

A. only a certain location

B. only during a certain time period

C. Only to prevent certain criminal conduct

D. at a certain location, during a certain time period, primarily

to prevent certain criminal conduct

85. A police officer who is assigned to patrol vehicle that is

conspicuously marked by clearly recognizable color combinations and
other markings and equipment usually accomplishes all of the following,
EXCEPT-

A. increasing the impression of police omnipresence

B. increasing the number of traffic violations observed

C. increasing the patrol officer’s attention to and awareness of

his/her duties and responsibilities

D. decreasing the difficulty of the task of supervision

86. Which of the following is NOT required when you, a Criminologist-

Police Officer accost a suspicious person?
A. Observe courtesy at all times
B. Announce your identity as police officer
C. Inform the person of his rights under the law

121 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

D. Hold a a person within the period reasonably necessary and

limit the
question to the person’s identity, place of residence and
other
personal circumstances

87. Before dispatch of patrol teams, the patrol supervisors, as

standard operating procedure, conduct briefing by disseminating
the following, EXCEPT-
A. Any orders, directives or instructions from higher authorities
B. Any orders, directives or instructions from the chief of
police
C. New policies or guidelines being implemented by the police
organization
D. News, information and other reports or matters of public
concern

88. When conducting spot inquiry or asking questions to person, to

obtain information, you, as police officers should –
A. be tactful and persuasive
B. exhibit cunning
C. adopt proven interview and interrogation techniques
D. be discreet, business-like and avoid unnecessary body
language

89. You and your buddy- beat patroller are accosting a suspicious
looking person. For identification purposes, you should___
A. demand form the suspicious person to present his wallet or bag
and take the cards or documents therein
B. personally take the cards or documents from suspicious
person’s wallet or bag
C. let the suspicious person’s get his cards or documents from
his wallet or bag and hand them over to you
D. take the wallet or bag where the suspicious person’s card or
document are placed after obtaining his consent

90. You are a police officer who are conducting a search during a
nighttime. Using a flashlight to aid your vision, tactical
considerations and common sense dictate that you should___.
A. Hold the flashlight low to confuse possible threats of
their
target
B. Hold the flashlight tightly away from your body to avoid
being an
easy target
C. Hold the flashlight high to ensure wider beam coverage
making it easy to expose the threats
D. Hold the flashlight close to your body to ensure a
firmer grip and avoid the risk of dropping it in case of
shootout

122 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

91. When you, a patrol officer works alongside with your colleague
during patrol operations, it is PRIMARILY in line with:

1. The directive to familiarize with your comrade

2. An existing policy to strictly observe the “Buddy System”
3. Existing guidelines to ensure transparency in your personal
and official functions
4. The Unit directive to closely monitor and supervise
personnel on the ground
5. The necessity to increase your survival advantage when
faced with a high-risk situation
C. 1 and 4 C. 2 and 5
D. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 D. 1, 3 and 5

92. While in automobile patrol, police officer should do the

following: No.1 Do not get out of the car. Just observe the
surrounding particularly persons, things, situations and
conditions; No.2 Whatever patrol pattern is used, do it in
regular and predictable manner.
A. Statement No. 1 is correct while statement No. 2 is
wrong

B. Statement No. 1 is wrong while statement no. 2 is

correct

C. Statements No. 1 and 2 are both correct

D. Statements No. 1 and 2 are both wrong

93. Assume that you are a Criminologist-Beat Patroller. Before you

assume your tour of duty, you are required, as a standard
practice –
A.to attend the roll call formation for briefing
B. to check your personal appearance, uniform and
individual equipment
and instruments
C.to report to your immediate superior officer and declare
readiness
for the task
D.to know the crime incidents that transpired during the
previous day

94. Which of the following is a criticism of decoy operations often

heard by police supervisors?
A. Decoy officers, because of their disguises, are often
mistaken by members of the public for criminals
B. There is no real way to measure the effectiveness of decoy
officers
C. Decoy officers have no real interest in preventing crime
D. Decoy officers are a form of police entrapmen t

95. The police are constantly striving to find a new and better ways
to patrol. Lately, police departments have used the concept of

123 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

directed patrol more and more. This kind of patrol directs police
officer to patrol –
A. Only a certain location
B. Only during a certain time period
C. Only to prevent certain criminal conduct
D. At a certain location, during a certain time period,
primarily to prevent certain criminal conduct

96. You are a Registered Criminologist-Police Officer asked by a

fellow police officer to explain the meaning of the “chain of
custody” as it pertains to evidence. You would be MOST CORRECT if
you stated that the chain of custody of evidence means that
evidence obtained by a police officer should –
A. Pass through the hands of as few officers as possible and
never be outside the control of authorized persons
B. Be delivered immediately to a supervisor, who shall take
control over the evidence
C. Be investigated to ascertain all of the previously owners
of the evidence
D. Pass only through the hands of investigators assigned to
the case

97. The pivotal figure in determining whether a patrol is successful

is the first-line supervisor. This statement is generally –
A. True, since the first line supervisor’s most important job
is seeing that patrol is performed properly
B. False, since the first-line supervisor has many duties and
therefore cannot be in all places all the time
C. True, since the first-line supervisor is the one to whom
the public complains
D. False since the first-line supervisor is no better than the
officers being supervised

98. A police officer who is assigned to a patrol vehicle that is

conspicuously marked by clearly recognizable color combinations
and other markings and equipment usually accomplishes all of the
following, EXCEPT –
A. Increasing the impression of police omnipresence
B. Increasing the number of traffic violations observed
C. Increasing the patrol officer’s attention to and awareness
of his/her duties and responsibilities
D. Decreasing the difficulty of the task of supervision

99. Police work often involves activity at crime scenes. Regarding

crime scenes, it is generally agreed that the key factor that
determines the success of a crime scene investigation is –
A. Efforts of the first officer at the scene
B. Investigative skill of the detective assigned to the case
C. Thoroughness of the supervisor who responds to the scene
D. Technology available to the laboratory technician at the
scene

100. Consider the following statements concerning the patrol

function in a police department:
1. The preponderance of the budget of most police departments
goes into the patrol division
2. As the effectives of the patrol force decreases, the need
for more specialists is increased

124 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

3. The backbone of any police department is its first-line

supervisors of patrol

A. Statement 1 and 2 are accurate; statement 3 is not

B. Statement 1 and 3 are accurate; statement 2 is not
C. Statement 2 and 3 are accurate; statement 1 is not
D. All the statements are accurate

POST TEST ON INTELLIGENCE AND SECRET SERVICE

INSTRUCTION: Choose the letter of the correct answer.

1. Procuring of information pertaining to the security of the state

will be categorized as –

A. intelligence C. covert intelligence

B. military intelligence D. police intelligence

2. Person who turns away or against his country, whether he becomes

knowledgeable of the purpose is known as –

A. defector C. traitor
B. diversion d. double agent

3. PSSg Reno, is following Nikolai who is suspected to be engaged in

selling marijuana. What kind of intelligence operation does Reno
engaged with?

A. Shadowing C. Surveillance
B. Undercover D. Convoy

4. Which term that refers to an organized and systematic conspiracy to

overthrow a duly constituted government?

A. Infiltration C. Rebellion
B. Subversion D. Coup de etat

5. A person in an organization whose job is to obtain information,

activities or operation is called –

A. spy C. button men

B. agent D. intelligence officer

6. An enemy agent, who has been captured, turned around and sent back
where he came from as agent of his captors should be dubbed as –

A. double agent C. agent in place

B. mercenary d. agent without a flag

7. As intelligence officer, you may obtain information from the source

or sources?
I. Person
II. Place
III. Things
IV. Soothsayers

125 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

A. I only C. I, II and III only

B. IV only D. I, II, III and IV

8. Dinah is Non-Uniformed Personnel of the PNP who has a security

clearance to have an access to classified information. Unknown to the
PNP, Dinah shares what she knows with the Big Boss of drug trafficking
syndicate. Dinah can be classified as ________ of the drug trafficking
syndicate.

A. penetration agent C. asset

B. agent of influence D. mercenary agent

9. Basic principles in police type of intelligence, EXCEPT –

A. It must be careful C. Must be available on

time
B. Operations must be flexible D. It must be true and
accurate

10. An activity dedicated to the counter concealment and protection

police intelligence operation.

A. Police Counter intelligence C. Police Strategic

Intelligence
B. Police Line Intelligence D. Public Safety
Intelligence

11. Collection of public information can be gathered from the

following, EXCEPT –

A. General Public C. Libraries

B. Newspapers D. Classified matters

12. As an Intelligence Officer, one of your task is the recruitment of

an agent whom you will called –

A. Expendable Agent C. Agent in Place

B. Agent of Influence C. Double Agent

13. Which term will you use describing a disguised observation of

places and things to obtain information?

A. Survey C. Information Ideas

B. Surveillance D. Casing

14. Document security is classified as follows, EXCEPT –

A. Top Secret C. Secret

B. Confidential D. Limited

15. Which term should be used that refers to any evidence of activity
inimical to the interest of the police organization?

A. Manifestation C. Indication

B. Axiom D. Hazard

126 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

16. This process determines the significance of the information in

relation to what is already known. Which of these?

A. Recording C. Interpretation

B. Estimates D. Accuracy

17. It is the sifting and sorting of evaluated information to isolate

significant element with respect to mission.

A. Integration C. Recording

B. Analysis D. Evaluation

18. An appraised intelligence report rated C-2V shall be read –

A. The information was reported by the PNP teams involved on the

raid are fairly reliable and the info is probably true.

B. The report was made by the AFP troops who are usually reliable
and the info was confirmed by other source.

C. The report was given by a civilian where reliability cannot be

judge and the info was improbable

D. Any of them

19. Intel Officer Y obtained information concerning the rampant illegal

gambling activities in one of the town in Pampanga. The report was made
by a member of the populace whose reliability cannot be judge but the
info is probably true. The information could be rated –

A. F-5 C. D-4

B. F-2 D. D-3

20. In analyzing information gathered it will prove:

I. Reliability of the source

II. Trustworthiness of the source

III. Quality of the information

IV. Dependability of the source

A. I, II and III only C. I, II, III and IV

B. I, II and IV only D. I, III and IV only

21. Intelligence analyst uses a standard system to evaluate the

reliability of the agent and the accuracy of information. As to

127 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

reliability it is designated by letter from A to F, whereas; as to

accuracy of the information, it is designated by numbers –

A. 1 to 6 C. 1 to 5

B. 1 to 9 D. 1 to 8

22. The furnishing of intelligence data to another police unit or other

government agencies so that they can use its importance in their
operation is known as –

A. distribution C. intelligence sharing

B. furnishing D. dissemination

23. Through the year, intelligence has earned and has been identified
to have many and varied meaning whatever it is, in total it is –

A. a network C. a profession

B. a tradecraft D. an activity

24. Which form of police intelligence that concerns with the various
types of confidential information that filter into the position of the
police, and the techniques employed in developing these lines of
information?

A. Counter intelligence C. Department

intelligence

B. Undercover intelligence D. Strategic

intelligence

25. Police intelligence which is primarily long-range in nature with

little or no immediate practical value is –

A. Department intelligence C. Undercover intelligence

B. Strategic intelligence D. Counter intelligence

26. Intelligence which is of immediate nature and necessary for more

effective police planning and operation is –

A. Line intelligence C. strategic intelligence

B. Military intelligence D. counter intelligence

128 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

27. A critical appraisal of information as a basis for its subsequent

interpretation, which includes determining the pertinence of
information the reliability of the source and agency through which the
information was derived and its accuracy. Which is being described?

A. Interpretation C. Deduction

B. Evaluation D. Dissemination

28. To the many dedicated intelligence operatives both clandestine and

overt, intelligence for them are as follows, EXCEPT –

A. a profession C. calling

B. job D. tradecraft

29. All Intelligence activities deal with –

A. source C. information

B. informant D. operation

30. Intelligence process refers to cycle steps known in its acronym –

A. PCAD C. OCAP

B. PACD D. PCDC

31. Intelligence information can be obtained from the person, things,

event or situation called –

A. alpha C. informant

B. source D. network

32. Destruction this intelligence documents need to be recorded and

witness must have a secret clearance. Which of these?

A. Restricted C. Secret

B. Confidential D. Top Secret

33. The process of changing messages from plain clear text to

unintelligence form is known as –

A. encrypting C. cryptography

B. decoding D. decrypting

129 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

34. When the coded messages are received from the agent, it will be
transformed into plain text, using the process called –

A. decrypting C. data analysis

B. encrypting D. crypto analysis

35. Greeting colleagues during the surveillance operation must –

A. be avoided C. be encouraged

B. be done D. be discouraged

36. Concerning the conduct of surveillance. Which of the following

statement/s is/are TRUE?

1. Surveillants do not talk to each other during operation and

use signals to convey the message they wish to impart to one another.

2. To be good surveillant and intelligence operative, a person

must have an ability to recognize people easily and differentiate
signals from natural gestures.

A. Both statements are true

B. Neither statements are true

C. Only statement 1 is true

D. Only statement 2 is true

37. One common denominator in guiding all propaganda efforts is -

A. lies C. truth

B. half truth and half lies D. deception

38. In this undercover operation, operative uses another person to

penetrate the target. Which of these?

A. Direct undercover C. Elicitation

B. Indirect undercover D. Clandestine operation

39. One time interview, discreet collection of background info,

installing of tracking devises are all example of –

A. long range undercover C. direct undercover

B. short range undercover D. indirect undercover

130 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

40. In the conduct of casing or recce, factors to be considered in

choosing personal meeting site are the following, EXCEPT:

A. Not overcrowded but not too deserted

B. Cover to be use

C. Security against surveillance and escape routes

D. Accessibility of the place

41. In choosing safe houses, the following factor should be considered,

EXCEPT:

A. Complete description of entrance, exits and escape routes

B. Operational technical requirements

C. Concealment, utility and suitability

D. Activity of the people in the neighborhood and location of

police outpost/station

42. Which of the following will be considered as an ideal planning and

preparation for surveillance?

A. Prepare a surveillance plan; seek the approval of appropriate

authority and study the target

B. Study the target; prepare a surveillance plan; and seek

approval of proper authority

C. Seek approval of appropriate authority; prepare a surveillance

plan and study the target area

D. Seek approval of appropriate authority; study the target area;

and prepare a surveillance plan.

43. “Debriefing” in foot surveillance means –

A. Preparation of report and its submission

B. actual surveillance

C. Observe time, casing of pick-up points

D. Collation of report, analysis of significant observation and

conclusions

131 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

44. Casing operation is conducted to accomplish the following

objectives:

I. Determine the suitability of sites for personal meeting and

dead drop

II. Devise plans for surveillance and preparation for search and
seizures

III. Verify information at hand

IV. Secure the wellbeing of an Agent

A. I, II and III C. I, II and IV

B. II, III and IV D. I, III and IV

45. A person who follow a colleague from a distance to watch out for
surveillance or counter surveillance is CALLED –

A. watcher C. convoy

B. counter surveillance D. envoy

46. All evaluated material of every description including those derived

from observation, report, rumors, imagery and other source from which
intelligence is produced is known in intelligence as –

A. facts C. data
B. information D. intelligence

47. Means used in intelligence utilize human being to gather

information –

A. technical information C. classical

B. agent in place D. counter intelligence

48. In information gathering source, this information is obtained

directly in its original form without adulteration by immediate party.

A. Regular C. Occasional
B. Primary D. Open

49. “One spy in the right place is worth 20,000 men in the field”,
statement made by –

A. Napoleon Bonaparte C. Alexander the Great

B. Frederick the Great D. Sun Tzu

50. Those measures, which seek actively to block the enemies’ effort to
gain information or engage in espionage, subversion and sabotage is –

A. active C. passive
B. deception D. detective

132 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

POST TEST ON INDUSTRIAL SECURITY MANAGEMENT

Direction: Choose the letter of the correct answer

1. Genuine key stolen from the owner.

a. Stolen key b. False key c. Fictitious key d. Lost key
2. Term used in England for lock pickers, safecrackers, and penetrators of restricted rooms or areas
a. Peterman b. Peterlock c. Burglars d. Lock Thief
3. A state or quality of being secure, freedom from fear or danger, assurance, certainty.
a. Hazard b. Security Management c. Security d. Physical Security
4. Which of the following is not one of the basic principle of security?
a. Command responsibility
b. Compartmentation
c. Security is the concern of all personnel
d. Balance between security and profit
5. It concerns with the installation of physical barriers, security lighting, use of vaults, locks and others
to block possible intrusion to the place protected.
a. Active measures b. Passive measures c. Security measures d. Security
scheme
6. Security measures that will deter man from committing such act of fear of being caught, charge in
court or get dismissed
a. Active measures b. Passive measures c. Compartmentation d. Police
visibility
7. A system of barriers placed between the potential intruder and the objects/matter to be protected
a. Physical Security b. Physical barriers c. Human barriers d. Structural
barriers
8. Probability of an event to happen that will lead to loss.
a. Threat b. Hazard c. Risk d. Vulnerability
9. An act or condition which results in a situation conducive to a breach of the protection system
a. Security Hazard b. Man Made Hazard c. Natural Hazard d. Threat
10. The importance of the firm with reference to the national economy and security.
a. Relative vulnerability
b. Relative criticality of operations
c. Relative National Security
d. Relative Human Security
11. A medium or structure which defines the physical limits of an installation.
a. Barrier b. Physical security c. Perimeter Barrier d. Structural Barrier
12. Include mountains, rivers, seas, desserts or terrain difficult to traverse.
a. Structural Barrier b. Natural barrier c. Perimeter barrier d. Structural
protection
13. Type of perimeter barrier made of chain link designed with mesh openings not larger than two
inches squares.
a. Wire fence b. Fence c. Bodies of water d. Building wall
14. Addition overhang or barbed wire place on vertical perimeter fences.
a. Wire fence b. Fence c. Top guard d. Guard
15. Type of barbed wire that is formed in large coils.
a. Top guard b. Fence c. Wire Fence d. Concertina wire
16. Provided at main perimeter entrances to secure areas located out of the doors.
a. Entry stations b. Entrance c. Lock d. Lock-up
17. Unobstructed area maintain on both sides of the perimeter barrier.
a. Zone b. Clear zone c. Tower d. Protection in depth
18. Similar to continuous lighting but can be turned on manually or by special device or other automatic
means.
a. Security lighting c. Standby lighting
b. Controlled lighting d. Emergency lighting
19. Is a visual or audible signaling device, which initiates conditions of associated circuits.
a. Alarm b. Barrier c. Protective Alarm d. Annunciator
20. A fire fighting equipment which can be portable or in cart that is used to put out fire.
a. Fire Extinguisher b. Fire Alarm c. Fire devices d. Fire Hydrant

133 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

21. Statement No. 1. Class A fire is a fire Involving combustible liquids and gases. Statement No. 2.
Class C Fires start in live electrical wire, equipment, motors, electrical appliances, and telephone
switchboards.
a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false
b. Statement No. is False while statement No 2 is true
c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true
d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false

22. A fire which can be extinguished by a non-conducting extinguishing agent such as carbon dioxide
or multi-purpose dry chemical.
a. Class A b. Class B c. Class C d. Class D
23. Protective device usually placed in the door, and window that can send notification when the
opening and closure occurs.
a. Smoke detectors b. Grill c. Magnetic door contact d. Vibration
contact
24. Devices mounted on barriers and are used primarily to detect an attack on the structure itself.
a. Magnetic door contact b. Vibration contact c. Grill d. All of the
above
25. Defined as mechanical, electrical, hydraulic or electronic device designed to prevent entry to a
building or room.
a. Physical barrier b. Man made barrier c. Lock d. All of the
above
26. Statement No. 1. Warded Lock is a type of lock that uses a set of obstructions, or wards, to
prevent the lock from opening. Statement No. 2 Padlock is portable and detachable lock having a
pivoted or sliding hasp which possess through a staple ring, or the like and is made fast or
secured.
a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false
b. Statement No. is False while statement No 2 is true
c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true
d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false
27. Portable and detachable lock having a pivoted or sliding hasp which possess through a staple ring,
or the like and is made fast or secured.
a. Combination lock b. Pin Tumbler lock c. Padlock d. All of the above
28. What is the lock that requires manipulation of parts according to a predetermined combination code
of numbers?
a. Pin tumbler lock b. Padlock c. Combination lock d. Disk tumbler lock
29. The title of the Republic Act 5487, as amended.
a. Private Security Guard Law c. Private Security Detective Law
b. Private Security Agency Law d. None of the above
30. Which of the following is not a requirement for an operator or manager of security agency?
a. Filipino citizen
b. Not be less than twenty six (26) years of age
c. College graduate and/or a commissioned officer in the inactive service or retired from the AFP
or PNP
d. Has taken a course/seminar on Industrial Security Management and/or must have adequate
training or experience in security business
31. Which of the following is incorrect in so far as a qualification for a security guard is concern?
a. Filipino citizen
b. High School graduate
c. Physically and mentally fit
d. At least eighteen (18) years of age but not more than fifty five (55) years old;
32. The following are the qualifications for a Security Officer, except.
a. Filipino citizen
b. Masters degree holder
c. Physically and mentally fit
d. Has graduated from a Security Officer Training Course or its equivalent
33. It is an act of baseness , vileness or depravity in the private and social duties which a man owes to
his fellowmen
a. Moral turpitude b. Integrity c. Honesty d. Morality

134 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

34. Security force maintained and operated by any private corporation utilizing any of its employees to
watch secure and guard its establishment
a. Government guard force
b. Security Agency guard force
c. Company guard force
d. None of the above
35. Statement No. 1- Private security agency/private detective agency/company security
force/government security force is allowed to possess firearms in excess of five hundred (500)
units; Statement No. 2- The numbers of security personnel to be maintained to secure regular
license to operate by the private security agency is a minimum of one hundred licensed private
security personnel and a maximum of one thousand.
a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false
b. Statement No. is False while statement No 2 is true
c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true
d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false
36. Types of guard forces, except:
a. Company or In-House Guard Forces c. Blue Guard Forces
b. Agency or Contractual Guard Forces d. Government Guard Forces
37. A written order issued by a superior officer assigning the performance of private security/detective
services duties.
a. Mission Order b. Duty Detailed Mission c. Duty Detail Order d. All of
the above

38. Statement No. 1-For a regularly licensed private security agencies which employ 200 guards, they
are allowed to have at least 70 units of licensed firearms. Statement No. 2- The allowed issued
ammunition for every guard shall not exceed twenty five (25) rounds.
a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false
b. Statement No. is False while statement No 2 is true
c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true
d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false

39. The following are the basis for the confiscation of firearms, except.
a. When the firearm is actually being used in the commission of a crime
b. When the firearm has just been used in the commission of a crime
c. When the firearm being carried by the security guard is unlicensed or a firearm is not
authorized by law and regulation for his use.
d. When the confiscation of the firearm is directed by the order of the prosecutor.
40. Not an advantage of the company guard force.
a. High caliber and receives higher salary
b. Provides better service
c. Can be trained to handle some of the more complex security duties
d. May be required to join the union;
41. The following are the advantages of the agency guard services, except.
a. Less expensive
b. Use is convenient
c. Large turnover
d. Less administrative and personnel problems
42. It is faith in oneself and his abilities.
a. Confidence b. Judgment c. Integrity d. Capability
43. It is ability to deal with others successfully without offending.
a. Confidence b. Judgment c. Cooperation d. Tactfulness
44. Statement No. 1- A security guard has no power to execute a warrant but it can execute a
citizen’s arrest. Statement No. 2- Any security guard may, incident to the arrest, search the person
so arrested in the presence of at least three (3) witnesses.
a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false
b. Statement No. 1 is False while statement No 2 is true

135 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true

d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false
45. Not a function of the private detective.
a. Background Investigation. c. Locating missing person
b. Investigation of crime d. Conduct surveillance work;

46. Statement No. 1- Private security agency operated by either a corporation or single proprietor is a
private property which cannot be taken or utilized by the government without a pay. Statement No.
2- In times of disaster the city or municipal council, may muster or incorporate the members of the
agency or agencies nearest the area of such disaster or calamity.
a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false
b. Statement No. 1 is False while statement No 2 is true
c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true
d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false
47. Grounds for the cancellation of security guard license, except.
a. Assisting or protecting criminals during on or off duty status
b. Providing confidential information to unauthorized person
c. Posted security guard found drunk or drinking intoxicating liquor
d. Rendering duty without firearms
48. Committed by any person, who with intent to gain but without violence, against, or intimidation of
persons nor force upon things shall take personal property of another without the latter consent
a. Robbery b. Theft c. Qualified Theft d. Simple Theft
49. It is an irresistible urge to steal items of trivial value.
a. The need or desire c. The psychological need
b. The criminal tendency d. All of the above
50. One who steals due to his inability to resist the unexpected opportunity and has a little fear of
detection.
a. Pilferer b. Casual Pilferer c. Systematic Pilferer d. Shoplifter
51. It is a positive inimical acts.
a. Threat b. Hazard c. Risk d. Vulnerability
52. Probability of an event to happen that will lead to loss.
a. Threat b. Hazard c. Risk d. Vulnerability

53. Susceptibility of the plant or establishment to damage, loss, or disruption of operation due to
various hazard.
a. Relative vulnerability c. Relative hazards
b. Relative criticality of operations d. Relative risks
54. A restricted area containing materials or operation of security interest;
a. Restricted area b. vault c. File Room d. Exclusion area
55. Area near or adjacent to limited or exclusive areas where entry is restricted.
a. Restricted area b. Exclusion area c. Controlled area d. Open area
56. Practical test or exercise of plans or any activity to test its validity, an operational readiness
exercise
a. Dry run b. Exercises c. Drill d. All of the above
57. Authenticated list of personnel given to the security allowing entry to a compound or installation or
part thereof
a. Employee List b. Access List c. Security List d. All of the
above
58. Type of code system so that security personnel or any employee when forced by armed men
intending to enter an installation can five alarm by the use of certain words
a. Duress Code b. Coded Code c. List Code d. Secret Code
59. The process of investigation/validating the truthfulness of the existence of hazard to an individual
a. Assessment b. Vulnerability Assessment c.Threat Assessment d. All of
the above
60. Condition or state that danger has already occurred which resulted to loss of life/liberty
a. Disaster b. Calamity c. Emergency evacuation d. Emergency situation
61. An indication of something impending and usually undesirable or unpleasant, with an intention to
inflict evil, injury or damage on another
a. Threat b. Danger c. Hazard d. Vulnerability
62. Protection of personnel especially ranking official from any harm, kidnap, and others act.

136 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

a. Personnel Security b. Personal Security c. VIP Security d. All of the

above
63. Mandated by law to provide protective security to government officials, foreign dignitaries, and
private individuals authorized to be given protection.
a. PSPG b. PSPD c. PSSD d. PSG
64. Exposure and teaching of employees on security and its relevance to their work.
a. Security drill b. Security Survey c. Security education d. Security
program
65. It is deciding in advance what to do, how to do it, and who is to do it.
a. Security survey b. Planning c. Security education d. Policing
66. Refers to checklist, audits, or inventories of security conditions.
a. Security survey b. Security education c. Security Planning d. Security Risk
67. Distinctive identifying qualities which serve as an index to the essential or intrinsic nature of a
person
a. Integrity b. Discretion c. Morals d. Reputation
68. The sum of traits that have been impresses by nature, education and habit upon the individual
a. Integrity b. Discretion c. Reputation d. Character
69. Opinion or estimation in which one is generally held. It is what a person is reported to be whereas
character is what a person is.
a. Integrity b. Reputation c. Moral d. Character
70. A process of verifying applicant’s information written at the applicantion form.
a. Background Investigation
b. Pre background Investigation
c. Post Background Investigation
d. All of the above
71. An inquiry into the character, reputation, discretion, integrity, morals, and loyalty of an individual in
order to determine a person’s suitability for appointment.
a. Personal Security
b. Personnel Security
c. Personnel Security Investigation
d. Post Security Investigation
72. Done when an employee is about to sever with the company in order to help identify problems
contributing to employee turnover.
a. Interview b. Exit interview c. Farewell interview d. Debriefing
73. Refers to the procedure followed, inquiries conducted, and criteria applied to determine the work
suitability of a particular applicant or the retention of a particular employee.
a. Personnel Security c. Entrance interview
b. Personal Security d. Exit interview
74. A cubicle in a building constructed a little lighter than a vault but of bigger size to accommodate
limited people to work on the records inside
a. Vault room b. Restricted area c. File room d. Exclusion area
75. A metallic container used for safekeeping of documents or small items in office or installation.
a. Safe b. Vault c. Cabinet d. Lock
76. A heavily constructed fire and burglar resistant container usually part of the building structure use
to keep and protect cash, documents and negotiable instruments
a. Safe b. Vault c. Cabinet d. File Room
77. This is an irreplaceable records , reproduction of which does not have the same value as the
original;
a. Non essential document c. Vital document
b. Useful document d. Important document
78. This is a record, reproduction of which causes considerable expense and labor, or considerable
delay.
a. Non essential document c. Vital document
b. Useful document d. Important document
79. Systematic program for gathering and analyzing information about competitor’s activities and
general business trends to further company’s goals.
a. Competitive Intelligence c. Intelligence
b. Strategic Intelligence Line Intelligence
80. An Act prescribing the Intellectual Property Code and establishing the Intellectual Property Office
a. RA 8291 b. RA 8292 c. RA 8293 d. RA 8294

137 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

81. It may consist of any formula, pattern, device or compilation of information which is used in one’s
business and which gives one opportunity to gain an advantage over competitors who do not know
or use it.
a. Trade secrets b. Patent c. Intellectual property d. All of the
above
82. Information which in some special way is related to the status, operations or activities of the
possessor over which the possessor asserts ownership.
a. Confidential information
b. Information
c. Proprietary information
d. Classified information
83. A grant given by the government to an inventor, conveying and securing to him the exclusive rights
to make, use and sell his invention.
a. Patent b. Intellectual property c. Ownership d. Proprietary
84. Part of physical security that deals primarily with the protection of processes, formulas, patents,
and other industrial and manufacturing activities from espionage, infiltration, loss, compromise or
photocopying
a. Industrial security
b. Operational Security
c. Transmission Security
d. Document Security
85. Any information and material, the unauthorized disclosure of which would cause exceptionally
grave damage to the nation, politically, economically or militarily.
a. Restricted b. Secret c. Confidential d. Top Secret
86. Any information and materials, the unauthorized disclosure of which would be prejudicial to the
interest or prestige of the nation or governmental activity or would cause administrative
embarrassment or unwarranted injury.
a. Restricted b. Secret c. Confidential d. Top Secret
87. Term given to the requirement that the dissemination of classified matters be limited strictly to
those persons whose official duties require knowledge thereof.
a. Need to know b. Dissemination c. Classification d. Tagging
88. Refers to the grant of access to classified matter only to properly cleared persons when such
classified information is required in the performance of their official duties
a. Security Clearance b. Access c. Document Security d.
Compartmentation
89. Is an administrative determination that an individual is eligible from a security standpoint for access
to classified matter of a specific category
a. Security Clearance b. Access c. Document Security d. Compartmentation
90. Any material that contains marks, symbols, or signs, either visible, partially visible or completely
invisible that may be presently or ultimately convey a meaning or message to someone.
a. Information b. Patent c. Document d. Property
91. A Circular issued by BSP concerning regulations on Bank protection.
a. Circular 620 b. Circular 621 c. Circular 622 d. Circular 623
92. An Act prohibiting the wiretapping in the Philippines.
a. RA 4197 b. RA 4198 c. RA 4199 d. RA 4200
93. The monitoring of telephone conversations by a third party, often by covert means.
a. Wiretapping b. Bugging c. Eavesdropping c. All of the above
94. Statement No. 1- Wiretapping is generally allowed by law. Statement No. 2-The Court may allow
any Law Enforcement Agency to conduct wiretapping in any offense under RPC.
a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false
b. Statement No. 1 is False while statement No 2 is true
c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true
d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false

95. Bugging – Interception of communication using an electronic device

a. Eavesdropping b. Wiretapping c. Bugging c. Encoding
96. Statement No. 1-Security guard even not on duty can effect a warrantless arrest as long it is
accordance with the Revised Penal Code. Statement No. 2- Security guard can effect in-flagrante
delicto and hot pursuit arrest.

138 | P a g e
POLICE ORGANIZATION, ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONAL PLANNING
RODOLFO V. CASTILLO, JR., Ph.D.

a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false

b. Statement No. 1 is False while statement No 2 is true
c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true
d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false
97. One of the basic principles of the security which states “cannot be delegated but the security tasks
can be assigned”.
a. Compartmentation c. Command responsibility
b. Security remain constant d. Concern of all personnel
98. An acts or conditions affecting the safe of operation of the facility. It includes sabotage, espionage.
a. Man made hazards b. Employee vulnerability c. Risk d. Natural phenomena
99. Statement No. 1-Perimeter barrier is the first line of defense of any establishment against
unauthorized engress. Statement No. 2-One of the purposes of the perimeter barrier is to expose
the perimeter of the area to be secured.
a. Statement No. 1 is true while statement No. 2 is false
b. Statement No. 1 is False while statement No 2 is true
c. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both true
d. Statement No. 1 and 2 are both false
100. A house like structures above the perimeter barrier which increases the range of observation.
a. Top guard b. Wire Fence c. Towers d. Security
lighting

-ooOoo-

139 | P a g e